JP7479953B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows gaming.

Conventional gaming machines are capable of simultaneously executing a battle effect and a timer effect as reach effects, and some are also capable of executing a slow-motion effect during the battle effect, which slows down the playback speed of the battle effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-99801 A

However, in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in terms of slow motion effects.

The present invention has been made in consideration of such problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can impress upon the player that the gaming machine is controlled in an advantageous state .

The gaming machine of claim 1 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A sound output means;
A display means having a display area capable of displaying an image;
a storage means capable of storing image data of an image to be displayed in the display area;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers on which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing the images arranged on the plurality of display layers;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
the display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area;
The specific performance is,
the display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs a performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either one of an advantageous aspect or an unfavorable aspect is notified as a performance result,
The performance execution means includes:
The first display area is capable of displaying the effected video,
In the second display area, information display relating to a game can be displayed;
During the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while the effected moving image in an effect manner progressing at a first speed is displayed in the first display area,
During the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effected moving image in an effect mode proceeding at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
the light emission mode of the light-emitting means can be changed in both the first period and the second period, and the light emission mode of the light-emitting means can be changed in the second period at intervals shorter than that of the first period;
In the second period, after displaying the effect video proceeding at the second speed, a still effect is executed in which a still image is displayed by freezing the effect video,
There are a plurality of still effects.
Depending on which of the presentation modes of the still presentation is, the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The performance execution means includes:
The information display can be a telop display,
The telop display can be displayed in an operational manner,
The operation of displaying the telop is continued even during the execution of the still effect,
the telop display speed can be kept unchanged during the first period and the second period;
It is characterized by the following.
Other gaming machines include
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1),
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance video, having a display area capable of displaying an image, and capable of displaying game-related information (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and a small symbol having a smaller display area than a decorative symbol) on the display area (e.g., a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J);
A storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers;
a performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a reach performance) by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the performance video of the character;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a performance in which the specific image is displayed in the display area (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 14-17 ),
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting background music (music) and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R),
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205),
The image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a part that creates a displacement target image by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area, and applies a displacement image to the displacement target image to create an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance).
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature portion 006SG) in which the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means is displayed in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is displayed in the display area with priority over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the effect video of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change between the first period and the second period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the effect sound including music and sound effects can increase the interest in the game. In addition, since a displaced specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data than when the image data of the displaced specific image is stored exclusively. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image during execution of the specific effect, which would result in a decrease in visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

In addition, the form for implementing the invention described below includes the invention related to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing an effect (specific effect) in which an image displayed on an image display device (display means) breaks and scatters at a specific timing such as during a reach effect during variable display, as shown in JP 2019-141396 A. However, in such gaming machines, since the effect is simply that the image breaks and scatters, it is conceivable to improve the interest of the effect by executing the effect while other images are displayed on the image display device. In this case, however, there is a problem that dedicated image data must be created for each image displayed on the image display device in order to execute the effect, and there is a risk that the amount of data stored in the storage means may become excessively large. In view of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can reduce the amount of data stored in the storage means in order to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine according to the second means is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) having a display area capable of displaying images, and capable of displaying game-related information (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols) on the display area (e.g., a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J);
A storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 14-17 );
Equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205),
The image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a part that creates a displacement target image by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area, and applies a displacement image to the displacement target image to create an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance).
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature portion 006SG) in which the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means is displayed in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is displayed in the display area with priority over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a displaced specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in a predetermined performance is displaced can be generated from image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific performance, so that the specific performance can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to a case in which image data of the displaced specific image is stored exclusively. Also, when the specific performance is executed, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced in accordance with the displacement of the specific image, which would result in a decrease in visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing the rotating display of the hold display in each hold display area, (C) is a diagram showing the moving display of the caption in the caption display area, and (D) is a diagram showing the blinking pattern of the fourth pattern. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data constituting a display on an image display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control data retention area. 1A is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. A diagram showing the execution decision rate of chance-up effects. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. 13A is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the presentation pattern of the operation promotion presentation, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the presentation content of each presentation pattern. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α1. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α2. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β1. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β2. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β3. A figure showing the presentation mode of the first reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the first reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the third reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the third reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation form of the second reach presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the fourth reach presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the fourth reach presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a performance control board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams of generation of a displacement image when a displacement image is applied to a displacement target image; 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of application of a displacement image to a displacement target image; FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a display image processing process. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a generated image and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern in the normal state, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state. A diagram showing the presentation form of the development suggestion presentation. A diagram showing the presentation form of the development suggestion presentation. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in the development suggestion performance. A figure showing the presentation form of a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the revival presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the revival presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a revival performance in a modified example. A figure showing the determination ratio of the display color of a crack effect image in a revival performance in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation format of the pre-reading preview presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in a preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-reading preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-reading preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a promotion effect in a modified example. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an image generated in a modified example and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. FIG. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form of the temporary stop suggestion presentation in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form of the temporary stop suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the temporary stop notification presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in the temporary stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification in a modified example. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a display of a stereoscopic image in a modified example. FIG. A diagram showing the presentation form of the variable display preview presentation and development suggestion presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine.

The following describes an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a gaming machine according to the present invention.

[form]
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance video;
a performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a reach performance) by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the performance video of the character;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the BGM and the sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The sound output means is characterized by including a playback circuit (e.g., a voice synthesis IC 079SG132) that plays back sound, an amplifier circuit (e.g., an amplifier circuit 079SG134) that amplifies the sound played back by the playback circuit, and a speaker (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) that outputs the sound amplified by the amplifier circuit.
According to this feature, highly reproducible sound effects can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of aspect 3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1 or 2,
The performance execution means is capable of outputting the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance by the sound output means during a predetermined period in the second period at the same speed as that of the first period, and is capable of outputting by the sound output means at a speed different from that of the first period during a specific period after the predetermined period in the second period (for example, as shown in modified example 079SG-1, during the first half of the execution periods of the second half portions of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as during the first half portion execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, while during the second half portion of the execution periods of the second half portions of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, performance sounds are output at a playback speed different from V4 (for example, V5 slower than the playback speed V4).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the speed of the presentation sound can be made different for a specific period within the second period during which the presentation video is displayed at the second speed, thereby improving the presentation effect of the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The sound effects corresponding to the predetermined effects include music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting background music (music) and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, the entertainment value of the game can be increased by the sound effects including music and sound effects.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
A light-emitting means (e.g., a play effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light at least in the first period and the second period and capable of changing a light-emitting mode is provided;
The effect execution means is capable of changing the light emitting state of the light emitting means in a cycle shorter than that of the first period during the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the second half of the execution period of the second reach effect and the second half of the execution period of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a cycle shorter than that of each of the execution periods of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, and the third reach effect and the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the period of change in the light emission mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period in which the speed of progression of the presentation is slower, thereby improving the presentation effect in the second period.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) including a first display area (e.g., a first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area (e.g., a second display area 079SG005Sa) closer to the periphery than the first display area, as a display area capable of displaying a performance video;
a performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a reach performance) that displays a performance video of a character in the first display area and outputs a performance sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the performance video of the character, and an information performance that operates an information display related to a variable display in the second display area (e.g., a rotating display of a reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), and a moving display of a telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C));
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
Regarding the information presentation, in both the first period and the second period, it is possible to execute information presentation that operates the information display at the same operation speed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution period and the latter half execution period of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the rotation display of the reserved display is displayed at a rotation speed V3, and the moving display of the telop is displayed at a moving speed V3).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the operation speed of the information display and the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation do not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect,
The total area of the first display region is larger than the total area of the second display region (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display region 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display region 079SG005Sa and the third display region 079SG005Sb).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the predetermined effects than the information effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6 or aspect 7,
The effect execution means is capable of executing information effect that always operates the information display at the same operation speed at least during a period during which a variable display is being performed other than the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-18 to 10-25, during a period other than during a reach effect, in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, rotation display of the reserved display is executed at a rotation speed V3, and in the telop display area 079SG005T, movement display of the telop is executed at a movement speed V3).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the operating speed of the information display does not change, which prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the information presentation.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixth to eighth aspects,
The information presentation includes a moving display presentation in which an information display suggesting a state related to the presentation in the variable display being executed is sequentially moved in the second display area (for example, a portion in which a moving display of a message according to a game state is executed in the telop display area 079SG005T),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a moving display effect that moves the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C), when the characters included in the message reach the right end of the caption display area 079SG005T and the display ends, the characters are displayed again at the left end of the caption display area 079SG005T and are moved again from left to right).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, at least a portion of the information display is always visible to the player, making it easier for the player to recognize that a moving display effect is being executed.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
a presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a presentation video of a character on the display means and outputting a presentation sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the presentation video of the character, and a notification presentation (e.g., a big win notification presentation and a miss notification presentation) notifying whether or not a special benefit will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined presentation;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
During the second period, it is possible to execute an effect performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that enhances the effect of the predetermined performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28, a part in which an effect performance that displays a convergent line on the image display device 5 is executed during the second half execution period of the second reach performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, the presentation effect of the second period is enhanced, and the effect presentation makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second period has ended and the notification presentation will be executed.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect,
The performance execution means includes:
The effect presentation can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effectiveness in enhancing the presentation effect of the predetermined presentation (for example, a mode in which a convergent line is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-28(C) and a mode in which a greater number of convergent lines are displayed than in FIG. 10-28(C) as shown in FIG. 10-28(D)).
It is possible to execute the effect production in a mode in which the degree of effect of enhancing the production effect increases sequentially as the second period progresses from the start point to the end point (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28(C) and FIG. 10-28(D), the number of convergence lines increases as the battle production progresses).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the mode of the effect presentation changes to a mode in which the degree of effectiveness for enhancing the presentation effect of the specified presentation increases sequentially, so that the effect presentation makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second period has ended and the notification presentation will be executed.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) including a first display area (e.g., a first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area (e.g., a second display area 079SG005Sa) closer to the periphery than the first display area, as a display area capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
a presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a presentation video of a character in the first display area and outputting a presentation sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the presentation video of the character, a notification presentation (e.g., a big win notification presentation and a miss notification presentation) for notifying whether a special benefit will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined presentation, and a specific information presentation related to a variable display in the second display area (e.g., a rotating display of a reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B) and a moving display of a telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C));
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, an effect video having a first progression speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
With regard to the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance, in both the first period and the second period, the speed related to the performance sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution period and the latter half execution period of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM, performance sound, etc. are output from speakers 8L, 8R at normal playback speed V4).
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-26(G), Fig. 10-29(E), Fig. 10-30(D), Fig. 10-31(G), Fig. 10-35(C), when decorative symbols stop in a combination of jackpots as a jackpot notification effect, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, by executing the notification presentation in a wide display area combining the first and second display areas, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a bonus has been awarded.

A thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the twelfth aspect,
The performance execution means includes:
A first display (e.g., a hold display) that operates in the second display area and a second display (e.g., a first hold memory display area 079SG005D and a second hold memory display area 079SG005U) that does not operate in the second display area can be displayed by the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area with the first display and the second display erased (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-26(G), Fig. 10-29(E), Fig. 10-30(D), Fig. 10-31(G), and Fig. 10-35(C), when a jackpot notification effect is executed, the reserved display, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made non-display and an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the notification display is executed in the second display area where not only the first display that is in operation but also the second display that is not in operation is erased, thereby further improving the visibility of the notification display in the second display area.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to thirteenth aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) including a first display area (e.g., a first display area 079SG005F) and a second display area (e.g., a second display area 079SG005Sa) closer to the periphery than the first display area as a display area capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
a presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a presentation video of a character in the first display area and outputting a presentation sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the presentation video of the character, a notification presentation (e.g., a big win notification presentation and a miss notification presentation) for notifying whether or not a special benefit will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined presentation, and an information presentation related to a variable display in the second display area (e.g., a rotating display of a reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B) and a moving display of a telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C));
Equipped with
The display means is capable of changing the visibility of the first display region and the second display region (for example, as shown in modified example 079SG-2, a portion capable of reducing the visibility of the second display region 079SG005Sa and the third display region 079SG005Sb in addition to the first display region 079SG005F),
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, an effect video having a first progression speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
During a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined performance to the execution of the notification performance, the visibility of the first display area changes but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-36 and 10-37 as a modified example 079SG-2, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by an effect image 079SG005Ea but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, the change in visibility of the first display area during the pre-notification period makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing when the notification presentation is executed, and the absence of a change in visibility of the second display area prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the information presentation.

A fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fourteenth aspect,
The display means includes an image generating means (e.g., a display control unit 123) capable of generating an image to be displayed, the image generating means having a plurality of drawing hierarchies including a first drawing hierarchical layer (e.g., second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and a second drawing hierarchical layer (e.g., first image data) that is a higher drawing hierarchical layer than the first drawing hierarchical layer and capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the second display area;
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image that the image generating means draws on the first drawing layer (for example, as shown in modified example 079SG-2, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by enlarging and displaying an effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as an image of the second image data).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately change only the visibility of the first display area without changing the visibility of the second display area.

A sixteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fifteenth aspect,
The image generating means changes the visibility of the image drawn on the first drawing layer from a specific position away from the area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing layer toward the area corresponding to the second display area over a predetermined period of time (for example, as shown in modified example 079SG-2, a portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing an effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as an image of the second image data so as to be enlarged and displayed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visibility of the first drawing layer changes over a predetermined period of time from a specific position toward the area corresponding to the second display area, making it difficult for the visibility of the area corresponding to the second display area to change.

A seventeenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the fourteenth to sixteenth aspects,
The device is provided with a motion detection means (e.g., a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of a player,
The performance execution means includes:
The notification effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's action by the action detection means (for example, a portion capable of notifying the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state or that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the player's operation of the push button 31B).
A motion prompting effect (e.g., an operation prompting effect) for prompting a player to perform an action by displaying a motion prompting image for performing the notification effect in the first display area is executable;
The visibility of the performance video of the predetermined performance is reduced, but the visibility of the action prompting performance is not reduced (for example, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data is not reduced).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the action-promoting effect can be made to stand out in relation to the predetermined effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to take action.

Aspect 18 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) including a first display area (e.g., a first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area (e.g., a second display area 079SG005Sa) closer to the periphery than the first display area, as a display area capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
a performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a reach performance) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a performance video of a character in the first display area and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the performance video of the character, a notification performance that notifies the player whether or not a special benefit will be awarded after the predetermined performance ends, and an information performance that operates an information display related to a variable display in the second display area (e.g., a rotating display of a reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), and a moving display of a telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2 (C));
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, an effect video having a first progression speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
During a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined performance to the execution of the notification performance, a pre-notification performance (e.g., a still image display performance) can be executed that displays a specific still image corresponding to the stop of the progress of the predetermined performance executed in the first display area,
The operation of displaying the information in the second display area continues even during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-20 and 10-21, the rotation display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U and the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in Fig. 10-2 (C) continue even during the still image display performance execution period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of a specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, by displaying a specific still image in the first display area during the pre-notification period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a notification presentation is being executed, and since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation stopping.

A nineteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eighteenth aspect,
The specific still image is an image in which the color of the still image of the specified performance in which the progress has been stopped has been changed (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-16 and Fig. 10-29 (A) to Fig. 10-29 (B), the color of the still image is inverted by executing the still image display performance in pattern SG-2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area has a different color from the still image of the specified effect, making it easier for the player to recognize that a notification effect is being executed.

A 20th aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the 19th aspect,
The color of the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area does not change during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, but the colors of the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the fourth pattern displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the information presentation when the pre-notification presentation is executed (since the color of the image of the information presentation does not change, it is easy to recognize that it is a specific still image with a color change).

A twenty-first aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to twentieth aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means capable of displaying the performance video (e.g., an image display device 5);
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
a presentation execution means (presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a presentation video of a character on the display means and outputting a presentation sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the presentation video of the character, and a notification presentation (e.g., a big win notification presentation and a miss notification presentation) notifying whether or not a special benefit will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined presentation;
Equipped with
The predetermined effect includes a first section (e.g., a first reach effect and a third reach effect) and a second section (e.g., a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect) subsequent to the first section,
The first section and the second section each include a first period (e.g., a first reach performance first half execution period, a second reach performance first half execution period, a third reach performance first half execution period, a fourth reach performance first half execution period) and a second period subsequent to the first period (e.g., a first reach performance second half execution period, a second reach performance second half execution period, a third reach performance second half execution period, a fourth reach performance second half execution period),
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period, a performance video in which the progression speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In the second period, an effect video at a second speed, which is slower than the first speed, can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
The specified presentation can be executed in a first pattern in which the first section is transitioned to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, the variable display of Super Reach α3 shown in Figures 10-20 and 10-21, and the variable display of Super Reach β3 shown in Figures 10-24 and 10-25), and a second pattern in which the first section is ended without transitioning to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2 shown in Figures 10-18 and 10-19, and the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2 shown in Figures 10-22 and 10-23).
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specified presentation is executed at the second speed in the first period and then moves to the second period, or whether the specified presentation ends without moving to the second period, and whether the specified presentation is executed at the second speed in the second period and a bonus is awarded, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A twenty-second aspect is the gaming machine according to the twenty-first aspect,
The performance execution means includes:
An end suggestion effect that suggests that the predetermined effect will end in the first section without transitioning to the second section (for example, an effect in which a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character during a first reach effect latter half execution period or a third reach effect latter half execution period) can be executed,
The end suggestion effect and a predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progression speed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during a first reach effect latter half execution period or a third reach effect latter half execution period, and the first reach effect latter half execution period or the third reach effect latter half execution period are executed at a progression speed V1).
When notifying that a privilege will be granted in the notification performance, a performance animation having a third speed of progression during a first notification period of the notification performance can be displayed on the display means, and a performance animation having a fourth speed slower than the third speed can be displayed on the display means in a second notification period after the first notification period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-25, 10-26(E) to 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29(E), 10-30(B) to 10-30(D), 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), a portion in which a video of an enemy character falling down as a result of an attack by an ally character hitting the enemy character is displayed at a progression speed V2).
When notifying that a special benefit will not be given in the notification performance, the display means can display the performance video at the third speed during the second notification period without displaying the performance video at the fourth speed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25, 10-27(E) to 10-27(G), 10-30(F) to 10-30(H), 10-32(E) to 10-32(G), and 10-35(D) to 10-35(F), a portion in which a video of an ally character falling is displayed at a progression speed V1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the speed at which the specified presentation progresses when the second section is entered is the same as the speed at which the end suggestion presentation progresses, so that it is possible to prevent the expectation of a bonus being awarded from being excessively heightened due to the speed at which the presentation progresses when the second section is entered being different from the speed at which the end suggestion presentation progresses, and when it is notified that a bonus will not be awarded, the fourth speed presentation video is not displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively dissatisfied, thereby improving interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-third aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to twenty-second aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
A motion detection means (e.g., a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
a presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a presentation video of a character on the display means and outputting a presentation sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the presentation video of the character, a motion promotion presentation (e.g., an operation promotion presentation) for encouraging a player to perform a motion, and a notification presentation (e.g., a big win notification presentation and a loss notification presentation) for notifying whether or not a special benefit will be awarded based on detection of a player's motion by the motion detection means;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
When the effect video of the predetermined effect is being displayed at the second speed during the second period, the action prompting effect can be executed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-24 and 10-25, during the latter half of the execution period of the fourth reach effect, the operation prompting effect is executed when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progression speed V2).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the predetermined presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the predetermined presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, since the predetermined presentation progresses at the second speed during execution of the action promotion presentation during the second period, the presentation effect of the predetermined presentation can be enhanced.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23,
The action promotion effect includes a valid detection period notification effect (for example, a display of a meter 079SG005M indicating an operation succession period of the push button 31B) that notifies a valid detection period during which the action detection means accepts detection of the player's action,
When the valid detection period ends, the effect execution means can execute, from a timing after the timing when the valid detection period ends, the same notification effect as that when the player's action is detected by the action detection means during the valid detection period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-33(E), 10-34(E) and 10-35(A) to 10-35(F), a portion that executes the same jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect based on the end of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B or the player operating the push button 31B).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, if the motion detection means does not detect the player's motion, the notification display will not be executed before the valid detection period has elapsed, thereby preventing the player from realizing whether or not a bonus will be granted during the valid detection period because the motion detection means does not detect the player's motion.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 24,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
a presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) suggesting that a special benefit will be awarded by displaying a presentation video of a character on the display means and outputting a presentation sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the presentation video of the character, and a notification presentation (e.g., a big win notification presentation and a miss notification presentation) for notifying whether or not a special benefit will be awarded after the end of the predetermined presentation;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
The sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined effect at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half and second half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4).
When notifying that a benefit will be given in the notification performance, a performance video having a third speed during a first notification period of the notification performance can be displayed on the display means, and a performance video having a fourth speed slower than the third speed during a second notification period after the first notification period can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, and 10-26 (E 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29(E), 10-30(B) to 10-30(D), 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), during the jackpot notification performance, the animation of the part where the attack of the friendly character hits the enemy character is displayed at a progression speed of V1, while the animation of the part where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progression speed of V2.
When notifying that a bonus will not be awarded in the notification performance, the display means can display the performance video at the third speed during the second notification period without displaying the performance video at the fourth speed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25, 10-27(E) to 10-27(G), 10-30(F) to 10-30(H), 10-32(E) to 10-32(G), and 10-35(D) to 10-35(F), the part where the video of the loss notification performance is displayed at the progress speed V1).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the specified effect changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified effect does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, when the awarding of a bonus is announced as a notification effect, a presentation video with a progression speed of the fourth speed is displayed, so that the presentation video of the notification effect can impress upon the player that a bonus has been awarded.

A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of a still image is inverted (still image display effect of pattern SG-2) as shown in Figure 10-16) during the second period only when a bonus is awarded.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not a special effect will be executed.

A gaming machine of aspect 27 is the gaming machine according to aspect 26,
The bonus granting means is capable of granting a first bonus (e.g., a non-variable jackpot game state) and a second bonus (e.g., a variable jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to a player than the first bonus,
The performance execution means can execute a special performance (for example, a revival performance shown in modified example 079SG-4) that notifies the player that a special benefit will be granted after first notifying the player that a special benefit will not be granted in the notification performance,
When the special effect is executed during the second period and the notification effect notifies the player that a special benefit will be awarded, the second benefit is awarded (for example, as shown in modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 and the jackpot notification effect is executed, the player is controlled to a jackpot game state of a jackpot with a certain probability of winning).
When the special effect is executed during the second period and the notification effect notifies the player that no special benefit will be awarded, and then the special effect is executed, the first benefit or the second benefit is awarded (for example, as shown in modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 and the notification effect is executed once and then the revival effect is executed, there are cases where the game is controlled to a non-variable jackpot jackpot game state or a variable jackpot jackpot game state).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the special effect is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the notification effect will notify the player of the award of a special benefit, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 28 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 27,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (for example, speakers 8L and 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the voice control board 13);
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance video;
A bonus awarding means (e.g., a CPU 103) for awarding a bonus (e.g., a big win game state);
A motion detection means (e.g., a push button 31B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
a predetermined effect (e.g., reach effect) suggesting that a bonus will be awarded by displaying an effect video of a character on the display means and outputting an effect sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the effect video of the character, an action prompting effect (e.g., operation prompting effect) for prompting an action of a player by displaying one of a plurality of action prompting images including a first action prompting image (e.g., operation prompting image 079SG005Ba) and a second action prompting image (e.g., operation prompting image 079SG005Bb) different from the first action prompting image on the display means, and an indication effect (e.g., a big win indication effect and a miss indication effect) for indicating whether or not a bonus will be awarded based on detection of an action of a player by the action detection means (e.g., an indication effect control CPU 120);
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video having a first progression speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution periods of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progression speed V1).
In a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect video at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the latter half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V2).
With regard to the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance, in both the first period and the second period, the speed related to the performance sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the first half execution period and the latter half execution period of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, BGM, performance sound, etc. are output from speakers 8L, 8R at normal playback speed V4).
The action prompting effect can be executed after the start of the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24 and FIG. 10-25, the part where the action prompting effect is executed during the execution period of the latter half of the fourth reach effect),
When the action promotion effect is executed by the first action promotion image, the first action promotion image is displayed while the effect video of the predetermined effect is visibly displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33, when an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, an effect image 079SG005E having a transparency is also displayed, so that the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E).
When the action promotion effect is executed by the second action promotion image, the display means displays the effect video of the predetermined effect in a more difficult to see manner than when the first action promotion image is displayed, while displaying the second action promotion image in a display area larger than the display area of the first action promotion image (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-34, when an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb larger in size than an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the transparency of the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is 0%, so that the visibility of the battle effect is reduced compared to when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed).
The rate at which a special benefit is awarded when the second action prompting image is displayed is higher than the rate at which the first action prompting image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the action prompting image 079SG005Bb is displayed is lower than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the action prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of a specified presentation changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the presentation sound corresponding to the specified presentation does not change between the first and second periods, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first action promotion image or the second action promotion image is displayed as the action promotion presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 29 is the gaming machine according to aspect 28,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying, on the display means, an effect video of the predetermined effect whose proceeding speed is the second speed while the first action prompting image is being displayed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), in the case where an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation prompting effect, a portion in which the display of an effect video of a battle effect is executed at a proceeding speed V2 while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba is being displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the predetermined presentation video is displayed at the second speed while the first action promotion image is being displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a 30th aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 29th aspects,
The performance execution means includes:
A first predetermined performance (e.g., a first reach performance and a third reach performance) and a second predetermined performance (e.g., a second reach performance and a fourth reach performance) can be executed as the predetermined performance, and after execution of a first specific section in the first predetermined performance (e.g., a first reach performance first half execution period and a third reach performance first half execution period), a transition can be made to a second specific section (e.g., a first reach performance second half execution period and a third reach performance second half execution period) subsequent to the first specific section,
The predetermined performance can be executed in a first specific pattern (e.g., variable display of Super Reach α1 shown in FIG. 10-18 or variable display of Super Reach β1 shown in FIG. 10-22) in which the first predetermined performance is notified of the grant of a benefit after the first specific section of the first predetermined performance is executed, a second specific pattern (e.g., variable display of Super Reach α3 shown in FIG. 10-20 and FIG. 10-21 or variable display of Super Reach β3 shown in FIG. 10-24 and FIG. 10-25) in which the first predetermined performance is executed and the second specific section of the first predetermined performance is executed, and a third specific pattern (e.g., variable display of Super Reach α2 shown in FIG. 10-19 or variable display of Super Reach β2 shown in FIG. 10-23) in which the predetermined performance is terminated after the first predetermined performance and the second specific section of the first predetermined performance are executed,
When transitioning from the first specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second specific section and when transitioning from the second specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second predetermined performance, a performance video whose progression speed is the second speed is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-18 to 10-25, when transitioning from the first reach performance first half execution period to the first reach performance second half execution period, when transitioning from the first reach performance second half execution period to the second reach performance first half execution period, when transitioning from the third reach performance first half execution period to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when transitioning from the third reach performance second half execution period to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, the portion in which the performance video of each reach performance is executed at a progression speed V2).
With regard to the sound effects corresponding to the predetermined performance, the speed related to the sound effects is output at the same speed in the first and second specific sections of the first predetermined performance and in the second predetermined performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-18 to 10-25, when the first reach performance first half execution period transitions to the first reach performance second half execution period, when the first reach performance second half execution period transitions to the second reach performance first half execution period, when the third reach performance first half execution period transitions to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when the third reach performance second half execution period transitions to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, the BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progression speed of the presentation video of the predetermined presentation changes when transitioning from the first specific section to the second specific section of the first predetermined presentation, and when transitioning from the second specific section to the second predetermined presentation, but the output speed of the presentation sound corresponding to the predetermined presentation does not change when transitioning from the first specific section to the second specific section of the first predetermined presentation, and when transitioning from the second specific section to the second predetermined presentation, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by changing the progression speed of the presentation video of the predetermined presentation to the second speed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the branching of the predetermined presentation.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through a passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If a game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the gameplay state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a big win or small win is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a big win game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a big win game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 079SG)
Next, the characteristic part 079SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present characteristic part 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the sound control board 13 in the present characteristic part 079SG is equipped with a sound synthesis IC 079SG132 that cooperates with the performance control CPU 120 to generate sounds (performance sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound of the sound generated by the sound synthesis CI 079SG132, and a sound data ROM 079SG133. The performance control CPU 120 outputs sound number data to the sound synthesis IC 079SG132 based on a performance control command from the main board 11, and causes the sound synthesis IC 079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the performance control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the input sound number data individually for each speaker 8L, 8R and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG134. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 and outputs them to each speaker 8L, 8R.

The sound data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each speaker 8L, 8R, which is associated with sound number data and is used to output sounds corresponding to the performance executed by the performance command to which the sound number data corresponds. In other words, this control data is a collection of data including sound data that chronologically describes the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L, 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period).

Figure 10-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape with a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns, reach effects, operation promotion effects and still image display effects described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes a second display area 079SG005Sa including a first reserved memory display area 079SG005D that can display the first reserved memory number by the number of reserved displays in white circles, a second reserved memory display area 079SG005U that can display the second reserved memory number by the number of reserved displays in white circles, and a caption display area 079SG005T that can display a caption indicating the game status.

In other words, the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb becomes the first display area 079SG005F.

The second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are display areas that display information related to the game (reserved display, subtitle display, display of the fourth symbol, and display of the number of reserved memories) at the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5, closer to the first display area 079SG005F. In other words, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this characteristic part 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 079SG005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 079SG005J, which indicates that the special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the number of reserved first special patterns and the number of reserved second special patterns.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with a height that is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5, and a left-right width that is the same as the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and left-right width are much shorter than the height H and left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5.

For this reason, in this characteristic part 079SG, the area of the first display region 079SG005F relative to the entire display region of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display region 079SG005Sa and the third display region 079SG005Sb.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, the performance control CPU 120 executes the pending display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) described below, which allows each pending display to be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (C), in the caption display area 079SG005T, the performance control CPU 120 executes the caption operation process (see FIG. 10-13) described below, which makes it possible to display a message according to the game status or the performance being performed (for example, if a specific reach performance is in progress, a message according to the status of the performance such as "XX mode in progress!") while moving from left to right at a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3).

When the characters included in the message corresponding to the game status reach the right end of the caption display area 079SG005T and cease to be displayed, they are simultaneously displayed again at the left end of the caption display area 079SG005T and moved again from left to right. Therefore, when a message corresponding to the game status is displayed while moving in the caption display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game status is always displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T, making it easier for the player to recognize the current game status.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is shown in which the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the caption display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the caption display area 079SG005T may each be rotated and moved at different constant speeds.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb flash alternately at a regular interval to indicate that the special symbol is being variable displayed. Also, if the variable display result is a miss, both of these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb are turned off (OFF) at the end of the variable display, whereas if the variable display result is a jackpot or miss, both are lit (ON) at the end of the variable display.

The display of the first special pattern reserved memory count and the display of the second special pattern reserved memory count in the third display area 079SG005Sb are displays that change only when a new reserved memory occurs and when a new variable display starts. In other words, unlike the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T, the display mode of the display of the first special pattern reserved memory count and the second special pattern reserved memory count in the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change except when the variable display starts.

Next, the display control unit 123 in this characteristic part 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying an image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figures 10-3 (A) to 10-3 (D), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the fourth pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data that is drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decorative pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (to the left of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), image data 2 is data that is drawn to display images of chance-up effects, still image display effects, and operation promotion effects, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (C), image data 3 is data that is drawn to display variable decorative symbols and reach effects in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in Fig. 10-3(A) to Fig. 10-3(C), display priorities are set for these image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1, and lowest for image data 3 (image display priority on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). In other words, on the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower (lowest layer) than images based on image data 1 and image data 2. Therefore, on the image display device 5, an image based on image data 2 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3, and an image based on image data 1 is displayed with priority over images based on image data 2 and image data 3, as shown in Fig. 10-3(D).

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (D), when an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as the image at the lowest hierarchical level, and therefore at least a portion of the image based on image data 3 may be difficult to view or may be impossible to view due to the image based on the first data and the image based on image data 2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the details of which will be described later, images based on image data 1 and image data 2 are always displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images with a constant progression speed, while images based on image data 3 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images or still images with multiple progression speeds based on data previously stored in the CGROM.

In particular, in this feature section 079SG, the details of which will be described later, during the reach performance of a super reach, the video of the reach performance can be displayed at the normal progression speed V1 and at a progression speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. This is because data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V1 and data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to store in advance only the data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V1 in the CGROM, and perform a specified process on that data to make it possible to display part of the performance video of the reach performance at the progression speed V2.

In this way, in this characteristic part 079SG, the video progression speed, which is the speed at which the presentation video changes, is set to V1, resulting in a non-slow motion period in which the player perceives the progress of the reach presentation as being a first speed that is fast, and the video progression speed is set to V2, which is slower than V1, resulting in a slow motion period in which the player perceives the progress of the reach presentation as being a second speed that is slower. In other words, the slow motion video, which is a presentation video with a slow presentation progress speed in this characteristic part 079SG, may be a video whose video progress speed is slower than the non-slow motion video, which is displayed before the slow motion video and has a video progress speed of V1.

In addition, in this characteristic section 079SG, a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach performances is exemplified (see Fig. 10-18 to Fig. 10-25), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the content of the performance video displayed on the image display device 5 as a super reach performance is the same as the content of the super reach performance shown in Fig. 10-18 to Fig. 10-25, but by executing a super reach performance in which the video progression speed does not change from V1 to V2, in other words, there is no slow motion period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a slow motion period has begun in the super reach performance shown in Fig. 10-18 to Fig. 10-25.

In other words, when a super reach performance is executed in which the content of the performance video is the same but the video progression speed does not change to V2, the performance video with the second speed slower than the first speed in this invention corresponds to a performance video with the same content that is displayed at a video progression speed V2 that is slower than the video progression speed V1 in a non-slow motion super reach performance, and thus is displayed for a longer period of time than a non-slow motion super reach performance.

As described above, in this feature section 079SG, the image progression speed of the effect video is slowed down to create a slow-motion effect in which the player feels that the reach effect is progressing slowly, and an example is given in which the sound output from speakers 8L, 8R does not change from the playback speed V3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to create a pseudo-slow-motion effect in which the player feels that the reach effect is progressing slowly by not changing the image progression speed of the effect video (keeping it at V1) and instead speeding up the playback speed of the sound output from speakers 8L, 8R and the light emission cycle of game effect lamp 9.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means, including a display means capable of displaying effect videos, and by making the speed at which the effect is performed by at least one of these effect output means differ between slow motion periods and non-slow motion periods, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect being performed is in slow motion during the slow motion period.

Note that in this feature section 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the display of the reach effect video is always executed at a progression speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the progression speed of the display of the reach effect video during the slow motion period may be variable (for example, the progression speed may gradually decrease over time, or the progression speed may increase or decrease within a predetermined range).

Figure 10-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 079SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 10-4 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "1" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning slot, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the number of remaining times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 10-5, in this feature section 079SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. 10-10.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 10-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in ROM 101. In this feature part 079SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature part 079SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature part 079SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 079SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 079SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 10-6(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature part 079SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature part 079SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 10-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 079SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 079SG will be explained using FIG. 10-7(B). In this feature section 079SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", and "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state, and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a jackpot that repeats 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a jackpot that repeats 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a jackpot that repeats 2 rounds (so-called 2 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a jackpot that repeats 2 rounds (so-called 2 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "probable chance jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable chance jackpot, "probable chance jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable chance jackpot, "probable chance jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable chance jackpot, and "non-probable chance jackpot" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probable chance jackpot.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature part 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this feature part 079SG). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, or variable probability jackpot C continues to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, so that the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is called a consecutive state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 079SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 10-8 shows the variation patterns in this feature part 079SG. In this feature part 079SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that in this feature section 079SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, .... Also, multiple super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided in the super reach fluctuation pattern, such as super reach α, super reach β, ....

The variation patterns in this feature part 079SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small winning".

As shown in Figure 10-8, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 079SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature 079SG. In this feature 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-5 (super reach β3 jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, if the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or probability jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table have different numbers of judgment values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5, respectively, and in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 30 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5, respectively. In other words, in this feature part 079SG, when the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot, the Super Reach β type fluctuation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win jackpot, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation patterns in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small win, the special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern) using the special win fluctuation pattern determination table.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β3 miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 miss).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β3 miss fluctuation pattern).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature part 079SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the reach effect of super reach α1 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot after the first half of the first reach effect described below is executed, the reach effect of super reach α2 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-2) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a miss after the first and second half of the first reach effect described below is executed, and the reach effect of super reach α3 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot or miss after the first and second half of the first reach effect described below is executed and then the second reach effect described below is executed.

The variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is set so that the longer the special chart variable display time is, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (expected jackpot probability) is, as shown in Figures 10-8 and 10-9. In other words, the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is set so that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the second reach performance is performed is higher than the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the first reach performance is performed.

The reach effect of Super Reach β1 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot after the first half of the third reach effect described below is executed, the reach effect of Super Reach β2 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a miss after the first and second half of the third reach effect described below is executed, and the reach effect of Super Reach β3 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot or miss after the first and second half of the third reach effect described below is executed, and then the fourth reach effect described below is executed.

The variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is set so that the longer the special chart variable display time, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the probability of a jackpot), as shown in Figures 10-8 and 10-9. In other words, the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is set so that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the fourth reach performance is performed is higher than the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the third reach performance is performed.

Note that, in this feature 079SG, an example has been given in which the second reach performance is always executed after the first reach performance, and the fourth reach performance is always executed after the third reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which the second reach performance and the fourth reach performance are executed by themselves.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, during variable display, an example has been given of a form in which each reach performance can be executed as a combination of the first reach performance and the second reach performance, and as a combination of the third reach performance and the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which the reach performance is executed in combinations other than these (for example, a combination of the first reach performance and the fourth reach performance, the second reach performance and the third reach performance, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the Super Reach β system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally set to have a higher probability of the variable display result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) than the Super Reach α system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but the present invention is not limited to this, and some of the Super Reach β system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) may have a lower jackpot expectation rate than any of the Super Reach α system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3).

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 079SG is provided with a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 079SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 079SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 079SG151C, a game control flag setting section 079SG152, a game control timer setting section 079SG153, a game control counter setting section 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 079SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151A stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 079SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 079SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 3 is provided with a performance control data holding area 079SG190 as shown in Figure 10-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 079SG190 shown in Figure 10-11 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 079SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 079SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 079SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 079SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, two commands, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory or the second special chart reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-11(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIG. 10-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the on state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the on state (step 079SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 079SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting part 079SG154. If the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" (step 079SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (step 079SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 079SGS104; Y), it is judged whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 079SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" (step 079SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 079SGS103 or step 079SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 (step 079SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

Following the processing of step 079SGS111, settings are made to send the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 079SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and the process proceeds to step 079SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 10-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the performance control process processing in this feature unit 079SG. In the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), then updates the hold display in the first hold memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U, executes a hold display operation process (step 079SG162) to operate (rotate display) the hold display displayed in the first hold memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U, executes a telop operation process (step 079SGS163) to perform a telop operation display in the telop display area 079SG005T, and executes a fourth pattern display process (step 079SG164) to perform a variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J, and then executes one of the processes in steps S170 to S177 depending on the value of the performance control process flag.

Figure 10-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 9. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 079SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to "7" as the stopping symbol. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B or the probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to even symbols as the stopping symbol. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a small win, the stopping pattern is determined from among the chance combinations "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a loss, the stopping pattern is determined to be a decorative pattern of three mismatched patterns, a combination other than the chance combinations described above (a loss pattern).

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is a super reach change pattern (step 079SGS277). If the change pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach change pattern (step 079SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and if the change pattern of the variable display is a super reach change pattern (step 079SGS277; Y), the process executes a chance up performance decision process (step 079SGS278) to decide whether to execute a chance up performance in the latter half of the first reach performance or the latter half of the third reach performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15, if the variable display result is a miss, there is a 20% chance that the chance up effect will be executed, and an 80% chance that the chance up effect will not be executed. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is an 80% chance that the chance up effect will be executed, and an 20% chance that the chance up effect will not be executed. In other words, in the variable display of the reach of this feature part 079SG, when the chance up effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when the chance up effect is not executed.

In this feature section 079SG, as shown in Figures 10-27 and 10-32, only one presentation pattern is provided as the presentation mode of the chance up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Multiple presentation patterns may be provided as the presentation mode of the chance up effect, and the expected probability of a jackpot may differ depending on which presentation pattern the chance up effect is executed with.

Furthermore, in this feature part 079SG, as shown in Figures 10-27 and 10-32, there is only one timing for starting the Chance Up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple timings for starting the Chance Up effect may be provided, and the probability of winning may differ depending on which timing the Chance Up effect starts from.

After determining whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), a still image display effect determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed to determine the effect pattern of the still image display effect that displays the still image that was displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the second reach effect to the start of the notification effect (jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect), and proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the still image display effect to be pattern SG-1 with a probability of 100%, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, determines the effect pattern of the still image display effect to be pattern SG-1 with a probability of 80%, and pattern SG-2 with a probability of 20%.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(B), still image display pattern SG-1 is a presentation pattern in which the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach performance is displayed as a still image, and still image display pattern SG-2 is a presentation pattern in which the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach performance is displayed as a still image, and then the color of the still image is changed.

In particular, pattern SG-2 is a presentation pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, so when the second reach presentation is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the still image display presentation is executed with pattern SG-2 (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is not a Super Reach α3 in step S079SGS281 (step S079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) (step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than a Super Reach β3 (step S079SGS282; N), the process proceeds to step S079SGS283. If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of a Super Reach β3 (step S079SGS281; Y), the process executes an operation promotion effect determination process (step S079SGS282) for determining the presentation pattern of an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach presentation, and proceeds to step S079SGS283.

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-17(A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to be pattern SS-1 with a probability of 80% and pattern SS-2 with a probability of 20%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be pattern SS-1 with a probability of 20% and pattern SS-2 with a probability of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17 (B), operation promotion presentation pattern SS-1 is a presentation pattern in which an image of push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and operation promotion presentation pattern SS-2 is a presentation pattern in which an image of push button 31B is displayed in a larger size than pattern SS-1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5.

In other words, as for the operation promotion effect in this characteristic part 079SG, when a large-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2), there is a higher probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect will be executed) than when a normal-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Therefore, the player can be drawn to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In step 079SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects whether or not to execute each of the aforementioned chance-up performances, still image display performances, operation promotion performances, etc., and selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the performance pattern and the variable pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 079SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this feature section 079SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display performance processing is executed, and determines whether the process timer after the subtraction has timed out. If the process timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to that process timer, and if the process timer after the subtraction has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, the presentation of the variable display of Super Reach α1 to α3 and Super Reach β1 to β3 in this feature part 079SG will be explained based on Figures 10-18 to 10-35.

First, regarding the variable display of Super Reach α1 to α3 shown in Figures 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26(A) to 10-26(G), when the variable display starts, a performance video such as a variable display of a decorative pattern starts at the normal progression speed V1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the telop from left to right (the progression speed of the video in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progression speed V3, and BGM and performance sounds corresponding to the variable display start from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4.

In the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light (blink) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a fixed cycle. Hereinafter, the blinking or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in this characteristic part 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are all synchronously blinked or lit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking or lighting of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

As shown in Fig. 10-18, Fig. 10-19, Fig. 10-26(A) to Fig. 10-26(C), when the timing for the reach effect to develop comes as a result of the progression of the variable display, the first reach effect first half execution period is entered, and a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A begins. As the battle effect progresses and approaches the second half of the first reach effect first half execution period, a video of ally character A attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from the aforementioned V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A punching enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when friendly character A's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α1, when the first reach performance first half execution period ends, as shown in FIG. 10-18 and FIG. 10-26(E) to FIG. 10-26(G), a video of ally character A's attack succeeding and enemy character A falling is displayed as a jackpot notification performance in the first display area 079SG005F, and then the decorative symbols stop in a jackpot combination to notify that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In particular, when the jackpot notification performance starts, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

During the jackpot notification performance, the animation showing the part where friendly character A's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (E)), and the animation showing the part where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progression speed V2 slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (F)). Then, the animation showing the decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination and controlling the jackpot game state is displayed again at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26 (G)).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a Super Reach α2 or Super Reach α3 variable display, when the first half of the first reach performance execution period ends, as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-26 (D), ally character A's attack is not successful and the game moves to the second half of the first reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figure 10-19 and Figure 10-27 (A) to Figure 10-27 (B), when the second half of the first reach effect execution period starts, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A continues.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progression speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B). The chance-up effect is executed at the progression speed V1, just like the effect video of the battle effect.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance, a video of ally character A attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. As a result, the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 displays in slow motion ally character A punching enemy character A.

In addition, during the period when friendly character A's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

If the variable display is that of Super Reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect ends, as shown in Figure 10-19 and Figures 10-27 (E) to 10-27 (G), in the first display area 079SG005F, after friendly character A's attack fails and he is defeated by enemy character A, a miss notification effect is displayed in which the decorative patterns stop in a miss combination to notify that the variable display result is a miss.

During the miss notification performance, the animation display is executed at the normal progression speed V1 during the part where ally character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a miss.

During the loss notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at the same progression speed V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-27(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the normal background image display before the reach performance. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is displayed as off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are displayed as off).

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach α3, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-27 (D), ally character A's attack is successful and defeats enemy character A during the second half of the first reach performance execution period. Then, the game moves to the first half of the second reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28(A) to 10-28(B), when the second reach effect first half execution period starts, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the battle performance progresses and the second half of the execution period of the first half of the second reach performance is reached, as shown in Figs. 10-20, 10-21 and 10-28(C), as an effect performance, converging lines start to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and a video of ally character A attacking enemy character B starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video starts, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, ally character A is displayed in slow motion punching enemy character B.

In addition, during the period when the attack of ally character A towards enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed at the same progression speed V3, and the background music and the performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking period of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking period of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking period becomes faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (D), the number of convergence lines as the effect performance described above is gradually increased.

In other words, during the latter half of the second reach effect, the progression speed of the battle effect video slows down to V2, causing the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F to increase and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 to become more intense. This increase in the number of concentration lines and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 makes it possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the result of the battle effect (whether a jackpot notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed).

Then, after the execution period of the latter half of the second reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (E), the image displayed at the end of the battle effect (in this feature part 079SG, the image displayed immediately before ally character A's attack hits enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as a still image display effect.

During the execution of the still image display effect, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F switches from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 returns to the cycle before the progression speed of the battle effect video slowed to V2.

When pattern SG-2 is determined as the presentation pattern for the still image display presentation, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle presentation is inverted as the still image display presentation, as shown in Fig. 10-29(A) to Fig. 10-29(E). After the still image display presentation with the inverted color ends, the jackpot notification presentation is notified that the attack of ally character A hits enemy character B, and that enemy character B will be defeated and then controlled to the jackpot game state. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification presentation, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification presentation is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29(F), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

As shown in FIG. 10-20, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the animation of friendly character A's attack hitting enemy character B is displayed at a progression speed V1, while the animation of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progression speed V2. Then, the animation of decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination after enemy character B falls is displayed at a progression speed V1. In particular, when decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not inverted as the still image display effect, and a jackpot notification effect as described above is executed as shown in Figures 10-30(A) to 10-30(D), or a miss notification effect is executed as shown in Figures 10-30(F) to 10-30(H).

In the case where the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the jackpot notification effect is the same as the case where the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the animation of ally character A's attack hitting enemy character B is displayed at a progression speed V1, but the animation of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progression speed V2. After enemy character B falls, it is displayed at a progression speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and effect sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

In addition, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the miss notification effect is that the attack of ally character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, after enemy character B's attack hits ally character A and ally character A falls, the decorative patterns stop in a miss combination, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, the loss notification effect is a video of friendly character A's attack not hitting and being defeated by enemy character B, which is displayed at a progression speed of V1. During the loss notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed of V4, without any change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(I), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image display before the reach effect effect. After the variable display ends, the combination of decorative and small symbols will be displayed as stopped during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol will be turned off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb will be turned off).

Next, for the variable display of Super Reach β1 to β3 shown in Figures 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31(A) to 10-31(H), when the variable display starts, a performance video such as a variable display of decorative symbols starts at the normal progression speed V1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the telop from left to right (the progression speed of the video in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progression speed V3, and BGM and performance sounds corresponding to the variable display start from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4.

In addition, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at regular intervals, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at regular intervals.

As shown in Fig. 10-22, Fig. 10-23, Fig. 10-31(A) to Fig. 10-31(C), when the timing for the reach effect to develop comes as a result of the progression of the variable display, the third reach effect first half execution period is entered, and a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses and approaches the second half of the third reach effect first half execution period, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character A is started to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video is started, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B punching enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when ally character B's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β1, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance ends, as shown in Fig. 10-22 and Fig. 10-31 (E) to Fig. 10-31 (G), a video of ally character B's attack succeeding and enemy character A falling is displayed as a jackpot notification performance in the first display area 079SG005F, and then it is notified that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In particular, when the jackpot notification performance starts, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made non-displayable, and images of the jackpot notification performance are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

During the jackpot notification performance, the animation showing friendly character B's successful attack is displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(E)), and the animation showing the enemy character being defeated is then displayed at a progression speed V2 slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(F)). The animation showing the decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination and the player being controlled to a jackpot game state is again displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(G)).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a Super Reach β2 or Super Reach β3 variable display, when the first half of the third reach performance execution period ends, as shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-31 (D), ally character B's attack is not successful and the game moves to the second half of the third reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figure 10-23 and Figure 10-32 (A) to Figure 10-32 (B), when the second half of the third reach effect execution period begins, the battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A continues.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect, when the presentation video of the battle effect is executed at the progression speed V1, a chance-up presentation may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-32 (B). The chance-up presentation is executed at the progression speed V1, just like the presentation video of the battle effect.

In particular, on the image display device 5, the small symbols are given priority over the chance up effect video, while the chance up effect video is given priority over the decorative symbols (the "7" displayed at the top left and right of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-32 (B)). Therefore, in this feature part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance up effect, the player can recognize that a variable display is being performed by visually checking the small symbols, and by displaying the chance up effect video over the decorative symbols, an area for displaying the chance up effect video on the image display device 5 can be reliably secured.

In this feature section 079SG, the chance-up effect animation is displayed with priority over the decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols may be displayed with priority over the chance-up effect animation. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which decorative symbol combination the currently executing reach effect has developed from, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. As a result, the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 displays in slow motion ally character B punching enemy character A.

In addition, during the period when ally character B's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

If the variable display is that of Super Reach β2, when the execution period of the latter half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in Figure 10-23 and Figure 10-32 (E) to Figure 10-32 (G), in the first display area 079SG005F, after ally character B's attack has failed and he has been defeated by enemy character A, a miss notification effect is displayed, indicating that the variable display result is a miss.

During the miss notification performance, the animation display is executed at the normal progression speed V1 in the part where ally character B's attack fails and in the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a miss.

During the loss notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at the same progression speed V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the normal background image display before the reach performance. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is displayed as off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are displayed as off).

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach β3, then as shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-32 (D), ally character B's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated during the second half of the execution period of the third reach performance. Then, the game moves to the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach performance.

As shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(A) to 10-33(B), when the fourth reach effect first half execution period starts, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character B begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (C). When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, ally character B punching enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when the attack of ally character B towards enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking cycle becomes faster).

In other words, during the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the progression speed of the battle effect animation slows down to V2, causing the game effect lamp 9 to flash more intensely, so that the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the result of the battle effect (whether a jackpot notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed).

Then, as the latter half of the fourth reach effect progresses, an operation prompting effect is executed. If the effect pattern of the operation prompting effect is determined to be pattern SS-1, an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba resembling the shape of the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, along with a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B and an effect image 079SG005E. The updated display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged updated display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the periphery of the image display device 5 are then started. As mentioned above, these images of the operation prompting effect are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 10-3), and are therefore displayed as moving images with a constant progression speed regardless of the progression speed of the battle effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(D), during the execution of the operation prompting effect, the meter 079SG005M is updated to notify the player of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged and updated. Note that since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transparency (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can view the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and the visibility of the battle effect is reduced compared to when the operation prompting effect is not being executed. Since the execution of the operation prompting effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at a progression speed V2 even during the execution of the operation prompting effect.

As shown in Figures 10-33 (D) and 10-33 (E), the battle presentation continues at a progression speed of V2 while the operation prompting presentation is being executed, but at the end of the operation prompting presentation (the end of operation acceptance of push button 31B), the presentation does not progress to the scene where it is known whether or not ally character B's attack will hit enemy character B; in other words, the big hit notification presentation or miss notification presentation does not start.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 10-34(A) to Fig. 10-34(E), when the presentation pattern of the operation prompting presentation is determined to be pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, which is larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and is an operation prompting image that imitates the shape of the push button 31B, is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is also displayed, and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. Note that, as described above, these operation prompting presentation images are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see Fig. 10-3), and therefore are displayed as moving images with a constant progression speed regardless of the progression speed of the battle presentation.

As shown in FIG. 10-34(D), during the execution of the operation prompting effect, the update display of the meter 079SG005M notifies the player of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb conceals most of the image of the battle effect. As mentioned above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image that is larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and has a transparency of 0%. Therefore, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation prompting effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progression speed V2 even during the execution of the operation prompting effect.

As shown in Figures 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), the battle presentation continues at a progression speed V2 while the operation prompting presentation is being executed, but at the end of the operation prompting presentation (the end of operation acceptance of push button 31B), the presentation does not progress to the scene where it is known whether or not ally character B's attack will hit enemy character B; in other words, the big hit notification presentation or miss notification presentation does not start.

If the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, or if the operation prompting effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (if the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends), the jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect will be executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or when the operation prompting effect ends.

As shown in Fig. 10-24 and Fig. 10-35 (A) to Fig. 10-35 (C), the big win notification effect after the operation promotion effect is a video of friendly character B's attack hitting enemy character B, which is displayed at a progressing speed V1, while the video of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progressing speed V2. The video after enemy character B falls is displayed at a progressing speed V1. During the big win notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progressing speed V3, while the background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(D), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

As shown in Fig. 10-25 and Fig. 10-35(E) to Fig. 10-35(G), the miss notification effect after the operation prompting effect is that the attack of ally character B does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, after the attack of enemy character B hits ally character B and ally character B falls, it is notified that the game state is not controlled to a jackpot. In particular, when the miss notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

As shown in FIG. 10-25, the loss notification effect is a video that is displayed at a speed of V1 until the attack of ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbols stop in a loss combination. During the loss notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a speed of V3, and the BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols stop in a loss combination and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. After the variable display ends, the combination of decorative and small symbols will be displayed as stopped during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol will be turned off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb will be turned off).

As shown in Fig. 10-26(H), Fig. 10-27(H), Fig. 10-29(F), Fig. 10-30(E), Fig. 10-30(I), Fig. 10-31(H), Fig. 10-32(H), Fig. 10-35(D), and Fig. 10-35(H), this characteristic part 079SG illustrates an example in which, at the timing when the variable display ends, the caption display area 079SG005T including the caption (message) is displayed on the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and, at the timing when the variable display ends, the caption display area 079SG005T itself is displayed on the image display device 5, but the display of the caption (message) itself in the caption display area 079SG005T may not be executed.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, in the variable display of Super Reach α3 and Super Reach β3, an example has been given in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened only during the slow motion period immediately prior to the notification effect (the period during which the display of the reach effect performance video is executed at the progression speed V2), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately prior to the notification effect. Also, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during part of the period during which the display of the reach effect performance video is executed at the progression speed V1 (non-slow motion period).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the first half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V1, and during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2. Therefore, while the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, it is possible to increase the degree of empathy of the player with the ally character displayed during the reach performance and to increase the sense of anticipation for the execution of the jackpot notification performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the first and second half of the first, second, third, and fourth reach performances, the output of background music and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R remains unchanged and is output at the normal playback speed of V4, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the sound output unit in this feature section 079SG includes a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, an amplifier circuit 079SG134, and speakers 8L and 8R, so that highly reproducible background music (music), sound effects, and other performance sounds can be output from speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume during variable displays, including when reach effects are being performed, and when jackpot games are being played, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the second half of the second reach effect and during the second half of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 flashes at a shorter cycle than normal, so that the game effect can be improved by flashing the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter cycle during the period when the progression speed of the effect video is V2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach performance or the latter half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance. In this way, the player can recognize from the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification performance will be executed soon, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach performance or the execution period of the latter half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing during the first reach performance to the fourth reach performance.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the progression speed of the reach performance video changes between V1 and V2, while the rotation speed of the reserved display and the movement speed of the caption are both constant at V3, and the playback speed of the performance sound output from speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4, which further prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, an example is given in which the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the caption displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are both V3, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the caption may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, so that while each reach effect is being executed, the player can more easily recognize the reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and captions displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25, during periods other than when the reach effect is in progress, the rotation display of the reserved display is performed at a rotation speed V3 in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the moving display of the caption is performed at a moving speed V3 in the caption display area 079SG005T. In other words, the rotation display of the reserved display and the moving display of the caption are performed at the same speed as when the reach effect is in progress, which prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the reserved display and the caption.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (C), when the characters contained in the caption (message) in the caption display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the caption display area 079SG005T and cease to be displayed, they are simultaneously displayed again at the left end of the caption display area 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, so that the entire caption (message) is always displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T. This allows the player to always recognize the entire moving display of the caption in the caption display area 079SG005T.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is shown in which the entire caption is constantly displayed and moving in the caption display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be times when part of the caption that is displayed and moving in the caption display area 079SG005T is not visible to the player.

As shown in Fig. 10-20, Fig. 10-21, and Fig. 10-28, during the second half of the second reach effect, the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2 and an effect effect of displaying concentrated lines on the image display device 5 is executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the second half of the second reach effect, and increasing the interest in the game. In particular, in this feature part 079SG, as shown in Fig. 10-28(C) and Fig. 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses, making it easier for the player to recognize that the second reach effect has ended and a jackpot notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed due to the increase in the number of concentrated lines displayed.

In this feature section 079SG, an example is given of the effect presentation of the present invention being the display of converging lines, but the present invention is not limited to this. Effects such as the movement of the movable body 32 within a predetermined range, the output of specific sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. may be executed as effect presentations, and the effectiveness of the effect presentations may be successively increased as the second reach presentation (battle presentation) progresses (for example, the movement range of the movable body 32 may be widened, the volume of the specific sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R may be increased, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself may be increased, etc.).

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-26 (G), 10-29 (E), 10-30 (D), 10-31 (G), and 10-35 (C), when the decorative symbols stop in a jackpot combination as a jackpot notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. This further increases the visibility of the jackpot notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa, while making it easier for the player to recognize that they are being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when a jackpot notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved memory display area 079SG005Sa may be displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. When the display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T are displayed, an image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, overlapping with the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T).

In this case, the visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by making the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T transparent or reducing the size of the display, or by making only one of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the reserved displays displayed within these reserved display areas invisible.

As shown in Figs. 10-28 and 10-29, during the second half of the second reach effect, a still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while as shown in Figs. 10-20 and 10-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotating display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in Fig. 10-2 (C) continue without stopping. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the reserved display is being displayed or that the telop is being moved during the execution period of the still image display effect, and prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the display of the reserved display or the telop due to the rotation display of the reserved display or the moving display of the telop being stopped.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-16 and 10-29(A) to 10-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed using pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted, so that the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by the inversion of the color of the still image.

In this feature section 079SG, as a still image display effect, a form in which the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is changed is exemplified by inverting the color of the still image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the still image may be changed to black and white, only a portion of the color of the still image may be changed, or a new color may be added to the still image.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed with pattern SG-2, thereby inverting the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, the colors of the pending display and caption displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the fourth pattern displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted, so the player can easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed by comparing the pending display, caption, fourth pattern, etc. displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa with the still image.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature part 079SG, there is a pattern in which the first reach performance or the third reach performance is executed, followed by a transition to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, and a pattern in which the variable display ends after the first reach performance or the third reach performance is executed, resulting in a transition to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the display of the performance video of the reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2 during the first reach performance or the third reach performance and then transitions to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, or whether or not a notification is given that the performance video of the reach performance during the second reach performance or the third reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2 and then controlled to the jackpot game state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24 and 10-25, during the first reach performance and the third reach performance, the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance and the first half execution period of the third reach performance are executed simultaneously at a progression speed V1, so that it is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations for being controlled into a jackpot game state due to the progression speed when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach performance or the first half execution period of the third reach performance to the second half execution period of the third reach performance being different from the progression speed of the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance. Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-25, 10-26(E) to 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29(E), 10-30(B) to 10-30(D), 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), in the big win notification performance of the feature 079SG, a video of an enemy character falling down due to a hit by an attack of an ally character is displayed at a progression speed V2, while Figs. 10-19, 10-21, 10-22, 10-23, 10-24, 10-25, 10-26(E) to 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29(E), 10-30(B) to 10-30(D), 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), As shown in FIG. 0-23, FIG. 10-25, FIG. 10-27(E) to FIG. 10-27(G), FIG. 10-30(F) to FIG. 10-30(H), FIG. 10-32(E) to FIG. 10-32(G), and FIG. 10-35(D) to FIG. 10-35(F), in the miss notification effect, the video of the friendly character falling is displayed at a progression speed of V1, so when the miss notification effect is executed, the video of the miss notification effect is not displayed at a progression speed of V2, which prevents the player from becoming overly dissatisfied and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, when the variable display result of the Super Reach results in a miss notification effect, the display of the performance video of the miss notification effect is executed at a progressing speed V1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in some of the variable displays of the Super Reach, the display of the performance video of the miss notification effect may be executed at a progressing speed V2 that is slower than V1. In this way, it is possible to create variation in the performance of the miss notification effect, and to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the progress speed V1 of the presentation video during the jackpot notification presentation is the third speed in the present invention, and the progress speed V2 of the presentation video during the jackpot notification presentation is the fourth speed in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the progress speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the progress speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-24 and 10-25, when the video display of the reach effect is being executed at a progression speed V2 during the execution period of the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the operation prompting effect is executed, so that the effect of the fourth reach effect can be enhanced by the operation prompting effect.

In this feature 079SG, an example has been given in which the display of the fourth reach effect is executed at a progression speed of V2 while the operation prompting effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the fourth reach effect may be executed at a progression speed of V1 while the operation prompting effect is being executed. Furthermore, a suggestion effect that suggests that the operation prompting effect will be executed before the operation prompting effect is executed may be executed, and the display of the fourth reach effect may be executed at a progression speed of V2 while the suggestion effect is being executed.

As the operation prompting effect of this characteristic part 079SG, in addition to the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M that notifies the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are displayed, the display of the fourth reach effect effect video at the progression speed V2 is continuously executed, but it does not progress to the notification effect. Furthermore, the same big win notification effect or miss notification effect is executed when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B and when the operation prompting effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. For this reason, the notification effect will not be executed before the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), so it is possible to prevent the player from realizing whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B due to the player not operating the push button.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is given in which the detection means in the present invention is a push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means may be an operating means other than the push button 31B, such as a stick controller 31A, or a sensor capable of detecting the player's actions, such as a motion sensor or touch sensor.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-26(E) to 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29(E), 10-30(B) to 10-30(D), 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and 10-35(A) to 10-35(C), in the jackpot notification presentation in this feature section 079SG, the animation of the part where the ally character's attack hits the enemy character is displayed at a progressing speed of V1, while the animation of the part where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progressing speed of V2. In contrast, as shown in Figs. 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25, 10-27(E) to 10-27(G), 10-30(E) to 10-30(G), 10-32(E) to 10-32(G), and 10-35(D) to 10-35(F), the animation of the miss notification effect of this feature 079SG is displayed at a progression speed of V1 and is not displayed at a progression speed of V2. In other words, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at a progression speed of V2, so that the player can be impressed that the big win game state is being controlled.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (a still image display effect in which the color is inverted) as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result in this invention is a jackpot, so that the player can be drawn to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect is inverted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that, in this feature section 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention may be an effect other than the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, or an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.).

In addition, the operation promotion presentation of this characteristic part 079SG can be executed in either of two presentation patterns: pattern SS-1, in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and pattern SS-2, in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb that is larger in size than operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion image that imitates push button 31B. When the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is visible through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, whereas when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, the majority of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is concealed by the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba, so the visibility of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is lower than when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 is lower than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, so that the player can pay attention to whether the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation promotion effect, the display of the battle effect video is executed at a progression speed V2 while the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is being displayed, which can increase interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb reduces the visibility of the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) that is being displayed at a progression speed V2 (slow motion). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, a dedicated background image may be displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) completely invisible. Also, during the period in which the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation prompting effect pattern SS-2, the display of the fourth reach effect's performance video may be executed at a progression speed V1 (non-slow motion).

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, as the reach performance of the super reach, the second reach performance can be executed after the first reach performance, and the fourth reach performance can be executed after the third reach performance. Furthermore, as the variable display of the super reach, the variable display of the super reach α1 which notifies of a jackpot after the first half of the execution period of the first reach performance, the variable display of the super reach β1 which notifies of a jackpot after the first half of the execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α2 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half of the first reach performance period after the first half of the execution period of the first reach performance, and the variable display of the super reach β2 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half of the third reach performance period after the first half of the execution period of the third reach performance, It is possible to execute variable display of Super Reach α3 which transitions to the second reach performance after the out-exchange part execution period, and variable display of Super Reach α3 which transitions to the fourth reach performance after the third reach performance exchange part execution period. As shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25, when transitioning from the first reach performance first half execution period to the first reach performance second half execution period, when transitioning from the first reach performance second half execution period to the second reach performance first half execution period, when transitioning from the third reach performance first half execution period to the third reach performance second half execution period, When transitioning from the third reach performance second half execution period to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at a progression speed V2, when transitioning from the first reach performance first half execution period to the first reach performance second half execution period, when transitioning from the first reach performance second half execution period to the second reach performance first half execution period, when transitioning from the third reach performance first half execution period to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when transitioning from the third reach performance second half execution period to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, Since background music and sound effects are output from 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the first reach performance first half execution period transitions to the first reach performance second half execution period, when the first reach performance second half execution period transitions to the second reach performance first half execution period, when the third reach performance first half execution period transitions to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when the third reach performance second half execution period transitions to the fourth reach performance first half execution period. Furthermore, the display of the performance video of each reach performance is executed at a progression speed V2, making it easier for the player to recognize the branching of the reach performances that he or she is drawing.

Note that, in the variable display of the Super Reach of this feature part 079SG, an example has been given in which two reach effects can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the Super Reach may be capable of executing three or more reach effects, or may be capable of executing only one reach effect.

The features 079SG of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the feature section 079SG, the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance are provided as the reach performance of the super reach, and in all of these reach performances, a form in which a part of the performance video of the reach performance is displayed at a progression speed V2 (slow motion) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern in which the performance video is not displayed at the progression speed V2 in each reach performance (a pattern in which the performance video is always displayed at the progression speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the performance video is displayed at the progression speed V2 may be provided. Furthermore, the performance content may be different between the reach performance in which a part of the performance video is displayed at the progression speed V2 and the reach performance in which the performance video is not displayed at the progression speed V2. In this way, it is possible to create variation in the reach performance of the super reach, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the performance sound output from speakers 8L, 8R is always output at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether the display of the performance video is being executed at the progression speed V2 or not; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as modified example 079SG-1, in the first half of the execution period of the second half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the performance sound may be output from speakers 8L, 8R at playback speed V4, the same as in the execution period of the first half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, while in the second half (slow motion period) of the execution period of the second half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the performance sound may be output at a playback speed different from V4 (for example, V5, which is slower than playback speed V4). By doing this, the playback speed of the sound effects can be changed while the reach effect video is being displayed at the progression speed V2, thereby improving the effect of the sound effects on the reach effect, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIG. 10-33 and FIG. 10-34, while it is possible to reduce the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F during the execution period of the reach performance by displaying the effect image 079SG005E or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in cases where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this manner, as shown in Figures 10-36 and 10-37, after the reach effect ends, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-36 (A) to 10-36 (D), when the second reach performance is being executed, once the second reach performance ends along with the still image display performance, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification performance or miss notification performance, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), a jackpot notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that they will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, or a miss notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that they will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 10-36(E) and FIG. 10-36(F).

Also, as shown in Figures 10-37 (A) to 10-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, when the player operates the push button 31B, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), a jackpot notification effect will notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, or a miss notification effect will notify the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 10-37(E) and FIG. 10-37(F).

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in Figures 10-36 and 10-37 is an image based on image data 2 shown in Figure 10-3 (B), and by expanding the drawing range as an image based on image data 2, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, without reducing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In this way, in this modified example 079SG-2, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, while as shown in Figures 10-36 and 10-37, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea as part of the notification effect after the end of the second reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and Since the visibility of the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change, the change in visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect will be displayed, and since the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty recognizing the hold display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth pattern, etc.

In addition, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image that is drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. 10-3(B), and is drawn so as to be enlarged toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, thereby changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F. Therefore, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is drawn so as to be enlarged toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, without changing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is possible to precisely reduce the visibility of only 079SG005F, and because the rendering of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data is performed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced, making it possible to make it difficult for the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb to change.

In addition, in this modified example 079SG-2, an example is shown in which the operation prompting effect is executed during the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting effect may be executed as part of the notification effect.

When the operation prompting effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in Fig. 10-38(A) to Fig. 10-38(F) as modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea in the same manner as modified example 079SG-2. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea has spread to cover the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in Fig. 10-38(D), the operation prompting effect is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting effect by displaying an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M.

The operation prompt image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M can be displayed as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), thereby avoiding reduced visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

After this, the player is notified that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state or that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state based on whether the player operates the push button 31B or the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B.

As described above, in this modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as images of the first image data is not reduced, so the operation prompting effect can be made to stand out against the fourth reach effect, effectively encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the variable display result is always a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the jackpot type of the jackpot may always be a variable jackpot (or even a variable jackpot A, which is the most advantageous for the player). Furthermore, as a performance pattern when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, a revival effect may be executed that notifies the player that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot state again after a miss notification effect is executed. In addition, in the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the jackpot type may be a probability variable jackpot or a non-probability variable jackpot (a case where the jackpot game state is controlled to a non-probability variable jackpot and a case where the jackpot game state is controlled to a probability variable jackpot). By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 079SG, a form in which a message indicating the game status is displayed as the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T may be a message indicating whether or not a variable display that is being executed or a variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to a jackpot game status, the title of the reach performance that is being executed, etc.

In addition, the characteristic section 079SG has been exemplified as a form in which a caption can be displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T according to the state of the currently executing effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T may be one that can identify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result in the currently executing variable display will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation), an explanation of the currently executing effect (particularly a reach effect), a preview effect that can be executed from a timing before a reach effect, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 10-33 and 10-34, an example is given of a form in which an operation prompting effect (display of operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or operation prompting image 079SG005Bb) is executed during a period in which the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting effect may be executed after the reach effect video returns from a progression speed V2 to a progression speed V1.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 10-33 and 10-34, an example of displaying an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb on the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this. As an operation prompting effect, it is not necessary to simply display an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb. For example, as a preliminary effect to displaying the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, an effect may be executed in which the images of multiple push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped to display the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb.

When the effect of the images of the multiple push buttons 31B moving toward the center of the image display device 5 is executed as a precursor effect of the operation prompting effect, for example, the speed of the movement display of the images of the multiple push buttons 31B may be slowed down as they approach the center of the image display device 5. This allows the player to accurately recognize that the operation prompting effect is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V2, the number of colors (light emitting colors) of the game effect lamps 9 may be different from when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V1. For example, when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V1, the game effect lamps 9 may be capable of emitting light in multiple colors, while when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V2, the game effect lamps 9 may be capable of emitting light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing this, when the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the light color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, a sense of unity can be given to the display of the reach effect video and the blinking of the game effect lamps 9, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Fig. 10-26, Fig. 10-29, Fig. 10-30, Fig. 10-31, and Fig. 10-35, the presentation mode of the jackpot notification presentation is exemplified as a form in which the decorative symbols are displayed while oscillating in a combination indicating a jackpot after the reach presentation ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing in which the decorative symbols are displayed while oscillating in a combination indicating a jackpot may be during the reach presentation.

The present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that allows the player to select at least a portion of the sound effects, such as background music, to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R during play by operating an operating means that the player can operate. In this way, if the player sets the output of sound effects to suit his/her preferences, when the video display of each reach effect is being executed at the progression speed V1, the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R will be played back at the playback speed V4 without changing, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the sound effects being played back at a speed slower than the playback speed V4, even if the player himself/herself has selected the sound effects to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as an end indication effect in the present invention, an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character can be executed during the second half execution period of the first reach effect or the second half execution period of the third reach effect, and when this effect is executed, the variable display result is always a miss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character is executed during the second half execution period of the first reach effect or the second half execution period of the third reach effect, the display on the image display device 5 may be temporarily switched to the normal background image display before the reach effect, and then an effect indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, a revival effect) may be executed.

When executing the revival effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked before the video of the revival effect is displayed on the image display device 5, to make the player aware that the revival effect is being executed. Furthermore, the presentation mode of the revival effect may be, for example, an ally character attacking the enemy character again and defeating the enemy character. In particular, when executing the revival effect, a part of the video of the revival effect (for example, a video of a scene in which the enemy character is defeated) may be displayed at a progression speed V2 to enhance the presentation effect of the revival effect.

In addition, although this specification discloses multiple characteristic features and variations, the gaming machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these characteristic features and variations.

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko game machine in which the probability of winning can be changed by changing the setting value as shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 9. In this case, for example, a pattern may be set in which the variable display result is a miss in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1, and when a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous to the player is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the variable display result in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1 may be a miss at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko game machine 1. In this way, the variable display result being a miss in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1 can be used as an indication that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, so that it is possible to attract the player's attention to the variable display result being a miss while suppressing a decrease in the player's interest due to the variable display result being a miss in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, a pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine capable of performing variable display (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1), which includes sound output means capable of outputting effect sounds (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R, and a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the audio control board 13); a display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying effect videos, having a display area capable of displaying images, and capable of displaying game-related information relating to the progress of the game (e.g., the number of reserved first special figures, the number of reserved second special figures, and a small pattern having a smaller display area than the decorative pattern) display images (e.g., the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J) in the display area; and a storage means (e.g., CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) and a display image of the game-related information displayed in the display area;
The display device includes an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers, and a performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a reach performance) that displays a performance video of a character on the display means and outputs a performance sound by the sound output means in association with the display of the performance video of the character, the performance execution means being capable of executing a performance that displays the specific image in the display area (e.g., a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 14-17), and capable of displaying a performance video having a first progression speed on the display means during a first period of the predetermined performance (e.g., a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 14-18). As shown in FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a moving image of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V1), during a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a moving image of each reach performance at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-19 to FIG. 10-25, during the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a moving image of each reach performance at a progressing speed V2 can be displayed on the image display device 5), and the sound output means can output the sound corresponding to the predetermined performance at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, during a row period, background music and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a normal playback speed of V4), the sound effects corresponding to the predetermined effects include music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting background music (music) and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R), the storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205), and the image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on a specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a decorative pattern and a lace drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area, a part in which a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is superimposed on the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to create an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance; the performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (for example, a development suggestion performance in the feature part 006SG) in which the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means is displayed in the display area during a variable display; and the display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which an arranged image is displayed in the display area with priority over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area which has the highest image display priority).

According to this configuration, the progression speed of the effect video of the specified effect changes between the first and second periods, but the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the specified effect does not change between the first and second periods, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the effect sound including music and sound effects can increase the interest in the game. Furthermore, since a displaced specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the specified effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to when the image data of these displaced specific images are stored exclusively. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image during execution of the specific effect, which would reduce the visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

In other words, by not changing the speed of the sound effects corresponding to the specified effects, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to cause discomfort to the player, can execute specific effects with a small amount of data, and can prevent a decrease in visibility of the display image of the game-related information when the specific effects are executed. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to cause discomfort to the player when installed in an amusement facility, and can execute specific effects with a small amount of data without decreasing the visibility of the display image of the game-related information.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of gaming machine that is less likely to give a player a sense of discomfort in the presentation, can execute specific presentations with a small amount of data, and can prevent a decrease in visibility of the display image of the game-related information, there is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can execute variable display, has a display area in which images can be displayed, and in the display area, a display means (e.g., an image display device 5) that can display display images (e.g., a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of game-related information relating to the progress of the game (e.g., the number of reserved first special patterns, the number of reserved second special patterns, and small patterns that are smaller in the display area than the decorative patterns), and a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information, a storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least the above; an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing the images arranged in the plurality of display layers; and a performance execution means (e.g., a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 14-17) capable of executing a performance to display the specific image in the display area, wherein the storage means changes the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area to a first position (e.g., a feature portion 00 The image processing means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data from the first position (for example, in the case of feature portion 006SG, the central part of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of feature portion 006SG, the upper or lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205), and the image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to generate a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement target image displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance). The display image is an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C moves downward), the effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature part 006SG) that displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display, and the display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority). Below, an example of the form of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 11 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 11 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 11 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 11(A).

As shown in FIG. 11(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 11(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 12, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value from 1020 to 1346 is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving. In other words, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same for all setting values, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the gambling nature excessively high. Furthermore, for the time-saving misses to which a common judgment value is assigned for each setting value, the range is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to the judgment of the variable display result being a time-saving miss.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

Figure 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 13, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S90174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, characteristic part 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) having a display area capable of displaying an image and capable of displaying game-related information related to the progress of the game in the display area (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols);
A storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 14-17 );
Equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205),
The image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, a part that creates a displacement target image by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area, and applies a displacement image to the displacement target image to create an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance).
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature portion 006SG, a reach suggestion effect in the modified example 006SG-1, a revival effect in the modified example 006SG-2, a foresight notice effect in the modified example 006SG-3, a promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6) that displays the displaced specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a specific performance can be executed by displacing the display position of a specific image from a first position to a second position simply by using image data for displaying a specific image in the display area and display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image. Therefore, the amount of data to be stored in the memory means for executing a specific performance can be reduced compared to when a specific performance is executed using dedicated image data.

The gaming machine of aspect A2 is the gaming machine according to aspect A1,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is displayed in the display area with priority over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific effect is being executed, the display position of the game-related information does not shift along with at least a portion of the specific image, thereby preventing the game-related information from becoming difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of aspect A3 is the gaming machine according to aspect A2,
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area overlapping with the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion performance),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become a displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced but is displayed overlapping the displaced specific image, so that the player can recognize the game-related information without feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of aspect A4 is the gaming machine according to aspect A2,
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area of the display area that does not overlap with the displacement specific image (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even when the specific image is displaced to the second position to become a displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displaced specific image, so that the player can accurately recognize the game-related information.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A2 to A4,
The game device includes a game identifier variable display execution means (for example, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 3) capable of executing variable display of game identifiers (for example, special symbols),
The performance execution means includes:
In a first region within the display region, a variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the game identification information can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in a central portion of the display region of the image display device 5, a portion in which a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of a special pattern can be executed);
In a second area in the display area that is different from the first area and smaller than the first area, a variable display of reduced identification information corresponding to the variable display of the gaming identification information can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, a portion in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 where a variable display of a small symbol corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol can be executed);
The display image of the performance identification information is arranged on the specific display layer, and the visibility state changes from a first visibility state to a second visibility state which is more difficult for the player to see than the first visibility state in response to the execution of the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-23, the decorative symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion performance is executed, the decorative symbols move upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, thereby reducing visibility).
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged on the special display layer, and the visibility state does not change from the first visibility state in response to the execution of the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-21 and 14-23, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbols, when the development suggestion performance is executed, the small symbols do not move from the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, and therefore the visibility is not reduced).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visual effect of a specific effect can be improved by changing the visual state of the effect identification information from a first visual state to a second visual state when a specific effect is executed, and since the visual state of the reduced identification information does not change from the first visual state when a specific effect is executed, a player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually checking the reduced identification information even while a specific effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 14-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B shown in FIG. 14-31),
The performance execution means includes:
In the specific performance, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(C), a portion that displays a decorative pattern and a background image across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a portion in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move in the left and right directions).
When the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced, an effect image (for example, a cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIG. 14-31) different from the images displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area is displayed at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a special effect can be more effectively recognized by the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect A7 is the gaming machine according to aspect A6,
The performance execution means is capable of displacing the first specific display area in a first direction and displacing the second specific display area in a second direction opposite to the first direction, as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a portion that moves the upper area 006SG005T to the right and the lower area 006SG005B to the left, and as shown in FIG. 14-31(E), a portion that moves the upper area 006SG005T upward and the lower area 006SG005B downward).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a specific performance can be executed as a displacement of the first specific display area in a first direction and a displacement of the second specific display area in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction, thereby further improving the effect of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of aspect A8 is the gaming machine according to aspect A6 or A7,
The displacement amount of the first specific display area and the displacement amount of the second specific display area in the specific performance are different (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a pre-reading preview performance, the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are different).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can further improve the effect of specific presentations.

The gaming machine of aspect A9 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A6 to A8,
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than a decorative pattern or a background image).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the display position of a specific image is displaced as a specific performance, the display position of the effect image is not displaced. Therefore, by contrasting the specific image with the effect image, the displacement of the display position of the specific image can be made more prominent, thereby further improving the performance effect of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine of any one of forms A6 to A9,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, a portion capable of displaying the crack effect image 006SG005H in two colors, blue and red, and as shown in FIG. 14-33, a portion capable of displaying the cutting effect image 006SG005S in three colors, blue, green, and red);
The proportion of the advantageous state controlled varies depending on the display mode in which the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, a portion in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the color in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 14-33, a portion in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the color in which the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the special presentation, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the special presentation.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A10,
The specific effect is an effect in which the specific image changes gradually (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development suggestion effect of the characteristic part 006SG, a part in which the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases gradually; as shown in FIG. 14-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, a part in which the decorative pattern in the middle gradually expands and the amount of movement of the fragments that make up the decorative pattern gradually increases; as shown in FIG. 14-35, in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5, a part in which the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image gradually increases).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the specific image changes in stages, thereby improving the presentation effect of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A12 is the gaming machine according to aspect A11,
The specific effect is an effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development suggestion effect of the characteristic part 006SG, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 14-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern in the middle gradually move from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery of the display area, as well as the portion in which the decorative pattern and the background image gradually distort toward the left side in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of a specific image from a first position to a second position in a specific presentation can be emphasized, thereby further increasing the interest of the presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A13 is the gaming machine according to aspect A11,
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image fragments (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-28, a portion in which a decorative pattern is composed of a plurality of fragments),
The specific performance is a performance in which the number of the displayed image pieces increases stepwise (for example, as shown in variant example 006SG-2, a part in which the number of pieces constituting the decorative pattern in the middle increases stepwise as the revival performance progresses).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visual effect of the image pieces gradually increasing can leave a strong impression on the player of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A14 is the gaming machine according to aspect A11,
The specific effect is an effect in which the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the display area increases stepwise (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-28, the part in which the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 increases stepwise in the revival effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the total display area increases stepwise, so that the player's attention can be more effectively drawn to the specific effects.

The gaming machine of aspect A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A11 to A14,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
The storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of pieces of image data for displacement are stored in the CGROM 206);
The proportion of the specific image controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the display position displacement information the specific image is displaced based on (for example, in a variable display in a super reach variation pattern, displacement image data for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the third stage is used, whereas in a variable display in a normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage is used, so that the proportion of the specific image controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the manner in which the specific image changes during the specific presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A11 to A15,
The plurality of pieces of display position displacement information include first display position change information in which the specific image changes from a first state to a second state different from the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach, the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage), and second display position change information in which the specific image does not change from the first state to the second state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a normal reach, the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage or the second stage).
The first display position change information and the second display position change information have a common change part for changing the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect by the image processing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21 and FIG. 14-22, in a case where displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid and moved to the third stage is used, and in a case where displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid and moved to the first stage is used, the difference between ... The portions where the images in the left region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common between the case where displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage is used and the case where displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the second stage is used,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first state to the second state as a specific effect, thereby further increasing the interest in the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means includes:
In the specific performance, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(C), a portion that displays a decorative pattern and a background image across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a portion in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move in the left and right directions).
After the displaced specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D) and FIG. 14-31(E), after the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left, the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is further moved upward and downward, respectively).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, after the displaced specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the specific presentation and increasing interest in the presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect A18 is the gaming machine according to aspect A17,
The boundary between the first specific display region and the second specific display region is displaceable in a direction different from that of at least one of the multiple display regions including the first specific display region and the second specific display region (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D) and FIG. 14-31(E), the upper region 006SG005T moves toward the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves toward the left, but the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific presentation can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the displacement of the multiple display areas and the displacement of the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.

The gaming machine of form A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A18,
At least in the specific display layer, images can be arranged across an area corresponding to the display area and outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-39, when performing a promotion performance, a decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a displaced specific image is displayed in the display area as a specific effect, the risk of an inappropriate display being performed in the display area can be reduced.
In addition, in variant example 006SG-5 of the present invention, when executing a promotion performance (specific performance), an example is given of form A in which an image for the promotion performance is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image to be displaced that has been enlarged so that its left-right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the image to be displaced to which the displacement image is applied is limited to only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, in other words, it is not necessary to displace the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of aspect A20 is the gaming machine of aspect A19,
The effect execution means is capable of enlarging the image displayed in the display area during a period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, a part that gradually enlarges a decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area according to the progress of the promotion effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display in the display area during the process leading up to the display of the displaced specific image, while maintaining the effect of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific performance, and displaying an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, with the upper area 006SG005T moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moving to the left).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special effects can be performed without giving the player a sense of incongruity, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine of any one of forms A1 to A20,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific performance, and displaying an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, with the upper area 006SG005T moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moving to the left).
When the displaced specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are the same (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, at least a part of the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after being moved to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after being moved to the left are in common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to add an element of surprise to the specific presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect A23 is the gaming machine according to aspect A21 or A22,
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is not displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the displaced specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in variant example 006SG-3, a part of the image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is not displayed as an image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left as a pre-reading preview performance).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can further increase the interest in the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A23,
The display means is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, a portion in which a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5′ is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) composed of a right-eye image (R image) and a left-eye image (L image));
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect that displays the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-45(B), a portion in which a variable display preview effect can be displayed in a stereoscopic image),
When the specific performance is executed, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-45(D), when a development suggestion performance is executed, an image displayed as the development suggestion performance is displayed as a planar image).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the stereoscopic presentation can increase the player's interest, and since a displaced specific image is not displayed as a stereoscopic image in the specific presentation, the specific presentation can be implemented in an optimal manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A25 is the gaming machine according to aspect A24,
the right-eye image and the left-eye image are arranged on a stereoscopic display layer in which arranged images are preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific performance is executed, a stereoscopic performance can be executed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect A26 is the gaming machine according to aspect A24 or A25,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the stereoscopic performance as an introduction performance of the specific performance during a period prior to the execution period of the specific performance during variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution of the stereoscopic effect allows the player to be aware in advance that a specific effect will be executed, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the specific effect.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, RAM 122, display control unit 123, etc. In the performance control board 12, the performance control CPU 120 operates according to a program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives performance control commands via the input circuit 260. Based on the performance control commands, the performance control CPU 120 also performs processing to cause the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 to perform display control of the image display device 5, such as generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the display control unit 123 constitutes a display control circuit together with a CGROM 205 in which data such as characters (image data of people, animals, letters, figures, symbols, etc., also called CG data) and decorative patterns, background images, a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J including small patterns for displaying a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D that identifiably displays the number of reserved first special patterns as game-related information in this feature unit 006SG, and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U that identifiably displays the number of reserved second special patterns, and an SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area are stored.

The performance control CPU 120 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to read out the necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which the image data is stored according to the received performance control command. The CGROM 205 is a ROM for storing in advance the character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, the image data of people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background images. Note that the CGROM 205 in this characteristic unit 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for displacing the positions of the pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying the data to the displacement target image described later. The display control unit 123 reads out the image data from the CGROM 205 according to the command of the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 then executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 is an integrated circuit equipped with a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, an attribute register 203 in which attributes (parameters used when drawing characters, data specifying the character drawing order, number of colors, zoom ratio, palette number, coordinates, etc.) are stored, a drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images in a drawing area of the VRAM area described later, a data transfer control unit 211 that controls the transfer of CG data stored in the CGROM 205 to the VRAM area, a display control unit 213 that outputs video signals (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) and synchronization signals for displaying image data stored in a display image creation area of the VRAM area described later, and a DA converter 214 that converts the video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal and outputs it to the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 includes a system bus and a CG bus, which are connected to the performance control CPU 120 via a CPU interface 201, and to an image processing DSP 264 to which an infrared camera 60 is connected. The CG bus is further connected to a CGROM 205 via a CG bus interface 204. A system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, allowing the performance control CPU 120 to access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

The drawing control unit 206, data transfer control unit 211, and display control unit 213 are also connected to the system bus, and are able to access the system register 202. The drawing control unit 206 and data transfer control unit 211 are also connected to the CG bus, and are able to access the CG ROM 205 and attribute register 203.

A VRAM bus is also provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via a VRAM bus interface 209. The drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus, and the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system registers 202 include a system control register that stores commands for initial settings, drawing, data transfer, etc., an interrupt control register that stores commands for outputting interrupt signals (described later), a drawing register that stores the drawing area in the VRAM area and the area where palette data is placed, a data transfer register that stores the source address and destination address when transferring data, and a display register that stores the display image creation area in the VRAM area.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V-blank interrupt signal to the performance control CPU 120 at the start of each V-blank (image update period), and also outputs various other interrupt signals to the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this characteristic part 006SG, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and in the next V blank, it is switched to the display image creation area, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In particular, as shown in Figures 14-2(a) and 14-2(b), this characteristic section 006SG generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers. The VRAM area includes a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area (see Figure 14-5). Note that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 14-5 (A) and 14-5 (B), the VRAM area contains a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 2, and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 3. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, which will be described later, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (composite) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image (described later) is applied to the displacement target image to create a displacement image.

The display image creation area is an area in which an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area, is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5.

In other words, Layer 1 is the top layer with the highest image display priority, Layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than Layer 1, and Layer 3 is the bottom layer with the lowest image display priority.

As shown in Figures 14-2 (b) and 14-5 (B), the layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing these images to display a first interface image 006SG005I including a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D that identifiably displays the first reserved memory number of special patterns and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U that identifiably displays the second reserved memory number of special patterns at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second interface image 006SG005J that includes a small pattern that is smaller in display area than the decorative pattern at the top right of the display area of the image display device 5.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 where the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background image is drawn to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this characteristic part 006SG, it is possible to generate an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by superimposing the image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) are displayed as the topmost image in the image display device 5 because they have the highest display priority, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) is displayed as the middle image in the image display device 5 because it has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background image) is displayed as the lowest image in the image display device 5 because it has the lowest display priority.

In this characteristic section 006SG, the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area are set to a transparency of 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently in the display area of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

Next, we will explain the method of displacing the image to be displaced in this characteristic part 006SG. As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), the image for displacement to be applied to the image to be displaced has multiple pixels having red component values (R values) and green component values (G values) arranged therein. These R values and G values each have a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Taking pixel A as an example, the display control unit 123 identifies the position of pixel X to be displaced from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image based on the R and G values of pixel A. Specifically, if the R value of pixel A is between 1 and 127, the display control unit 123 identifies the position moved from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image in the negative direction (leftward) of the X axis as the coordinate (position) of pixel X in the X axis direction, and if the R value of pixel A is between 129 and 256, the display control unit 123 identifies the position moved from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image in the positive direction (rightward) of the X axis as the coordinate of pixel X in the X axis direction. The amount of movement in the X axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median R value.

If the G value of pixel A is between 1 and 127, the position moved in the negative direction (downward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is identified as the Y coordinate of pixel X, and if the G value of pixel A is between 129 and 256, the position moved in the positive direction (upward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is identified as the Y coordinate (position) of pixel X. Note that the amount of movement in the Y axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is the difference from 128, which is the median G value.

Then, once the position of pixel X in the displacement target image has been identified, pixel X is designated as the pixel to be displayed at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, pixel X is displaced to a position corresponding to pixel A. In other words, in this feature part 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A, it is possible to displace any pixel X to a position corresponding to pixel A, and by adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A to the same value, it is also possible to displace a specific pixel X that is the same distance away from the position corresponding to pixel A to a position corresponding to pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for multiple pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), the displacement image is composed of multiple regions (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement image d) with different R and G values, and each region is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement image.

For example, as shown in Fig. 14-4(A) to Fig. 14-4(C), the following regions are provided that make up the displacement image: displacement image a with an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 1 to 127; displacement image b with an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 129 to 256; displacement image c with an R value of any one of 1 to 127 and a G value of 128; and displacement image d with an R value of any one of 129 to 256 and a G value of 128. The image of the triple circle is the image to be displaced.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 14-4(D), for displacement image a, the range in the displacement target image that is moved downward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position in displacement image a is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-4(E), for displacement image b, the range in the displacement target image that is moved upward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position in displacement image b is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-4(F), for displacement image c, the range in the displacement target image that is moved left by the difference in R value from the corresponding position in displacement image c is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-4(G), for displacement image d, the range in the displacement target image that is moved right by the difference in R value from the corresponding position in displacement image d is specified as the display range in the displacement image.

As described above, by displacing the specified range from the image to be displaced to the positions of displacement images a, b, c, and d using the R and G values of displacement images a, b, c, and d, a displacement image such as that shown in Figure 14-4 (H) is generated.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, the boundaries between displacement images a, b, c, and d are clearly defined by setting either the R value or the G value of each of displacement images a, b, c, and d to a fixed value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to generate a gradation-like image as a displacement image by gradually varying the R value and G value of the pixels near each boundary between displacement images a, b, c, and d.

Figure 14-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 006SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 14-6 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 14-6 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-6 (B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 14-6(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 14-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 14-7, in this feature section 006SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 14-8 shows an example of the configuration of a special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 006SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature section 006SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 006SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 006SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 006SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 14-9 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 006SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 006SG will be explained using FIG. 14-9 (B). In this feature section 006SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of a jackpot game state of a special jackpot A to a special jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the special jackpots A to C, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 006SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 14-10 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 006SG. In this feature section 006SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that, in this feature section 006SG, one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this feature section 006SG, two types of fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of super reach fluctuation patterns or only one type may be provided.

The Super Reach fluctuation patterns in this feature part 006SG include Super Reach α fluctuation patterns in which the variable display results in a jackpot (PB1-2) and a miss (PA2-2), and Super Reach β fluctuation patterns in which the variable display results in a jackpot (PB1-3) and a miss (PA2-3).

As shown in Figure 14-10, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 006SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing. Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In particular, the special chart change time of the Super Reach β change pattern is set to be longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach α change pattern. In other words, the Super Reach β change pattern is set to have a higher chance of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" than the Super Reach α change pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

The normal reach variation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and super reach variation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in this feature section 006 are also variation patterns that execute a development suggestion effect to a super reach reach effect after a reach is established during the variable display. In the normal reach variation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed after the development suggestion effect is executed without developing into a super reach reach effect, while in the super reach variation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the super reach reach effect is executed after the development suggestion effect is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, the normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are exemplified as examples of a form in which a development suggestion effect to a super reach reach effect is executed after a reach is established during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and between the normal reach fluctuation patterns and the super reach fluctuation patterns, a fluctuation pattern in which a development suggestion effect is not executed may be set.In addition, when a development suggestion effect is executed, the rate of development to a super reach reach effect may be set higher than when a development suggestion effect is not executed.

Figure 14-11 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature part 006SG. In this feature part 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-11, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table.

Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 at a rate of 60%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for any of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables depending on the type of jackpot. By doing this, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern's variable display has resulted in the variable display result being a jackpot, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%; PA2-1 at a rate of 40%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%; PA2-1 at a rate of 30%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%; PA2-1 at a rate of 20%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%; PA2-1 at a rate of 20%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 006SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or on the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the type of big win, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reserved data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 14-1 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area. The performance control data storage area shown in Figure 14-15 (A) has a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The performance control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 006SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer is stored in a specified area of the performance control buffer setting section. The start winning time receiving command buffer has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. The start winning time receiving command buffer also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Figure 14-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 6 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 14-12, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 006SGS141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 006SGS144), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 006SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special pattern display result judgment table shown in FIG. 14-8 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006SGS150a). In addition, in this step 006SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 006SGS150a, whether or not to set the special chart display result as a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) as a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON in the game control flag setting section (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-9 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 006SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it can be set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it can be set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it can be set to "3".

After step 006SGS155 is completed, or if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the game is not a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; N), a fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the on state) and the determined jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot," a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C," a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are merely examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 006SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 14-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 6 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 14-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), the CPU 103 selects and sets a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots (step 006SGS164).

If the judgment in step 006SGS161 indicates that the jackpot flag is not set to the ON state (step 006SGS161; N), the game control flag setting unit judges whether the time-saving flag is set to the ON state to judge whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 006SGS168). Then, if the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 006SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns (step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 006SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example by reading the stored value of a reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit, and it is determined whether the identified reserved memory number of variable special charts is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 006SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 006SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 006SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), the program selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable pattern (step 006SGS174), and proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special win fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 006SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, step 006SGS175 determines the variation pattern, and determines whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, step 006SGS170 includes a process for determining whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a "reach" state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 006SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 006SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 006SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special pattern starts to change (step 006SGS177). For example, when the special pattern change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the processing of step 006SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result). After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation processing (step 006SGS179), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variable pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 14-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol (step 006SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to turn them off (step 006SGS184) if they are turned on, and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-probability variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 006SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 006SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 006SGS189), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving counter value is "0." If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 006SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving count is remaining and the game is in a high base state, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 006SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the program proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS193; Y), the program clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 006SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base state) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 006SGS195), and then proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figures 14-15 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 006SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the variable jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 006SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 006SGS214). Then, after sending a game state command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 006SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of special patterns (step 006SGS216).

Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figures 14-16 are part of the flowchart of the performance control process shown in Figure 13. In the performance control process, after executing the above-mentioned advance notice setting process (step S161), the performance control CPU 120 executes a background image change process (step 006SG162) to change the background image displayed on the image display device 5, and then executes one of the processes from step S170 to step S175.

As a background image change process, for example, the performance control CPU 120 decides to change the background image displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%) at the start of the variable display (the timing at which the performance control process process is executed with the performance control process flag value set to 1), and starts displaying a new background image on the image display device 5 in response to this decision. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, when any of a number of background images is displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is variable displayed and a performance corresponding to the variable display is executed.

In addition, in the background image change process, when the game state changes (for example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the jackpot game state, from the jackpot game state to the special state or the time-saving state, or from the special state or the time-saving state to the jackpot state or the normal state), the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to display a background image corresponding to the new game state on the image display device 5.

Figure 14-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the variable display during performance processing of the performance control process. In the variable display during performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements by 1 the values of the process timer corresponding to the process table selected by the performance control CPU 120 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern in the variable display start setting processing, the variable display time timer set by the performance control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting processing, and the variable display control timer (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the contents of the next process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 006SGS909). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921; Y), the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to create image data for the next display screen for the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switch of the decorative patterns) (step 006SGS922). The performance control CPU 120 also determines whether the variable display is a variable display of a normal reach or super reach variable pattern (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923; N), proceed to step 006SGS927. If the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), it is further determined whether the display image processing flag described below is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926. If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), the process checks the contents of the process data being executed to determine whether it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925). If it is not the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925; N), proceed to step 006SGS927. If it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926.

In step 006SGS926, the performance control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process to process (displace) a portion of the image to be displayed on the image display device 5, and then proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to execute a process of synthesizing (superimposing) the images created in the above-mentioned steps 006SGS922 and 006SGS921 in the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, variable display control of the decorative pattern is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on an image in which an image such as the set background image is superimposed on an image based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, decorative pattern, etc. in the changing decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 14-19, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 006SG is a part of the background image, a first interface image 006SG005I, a second interface image 006SG005J, and a decorative pattern, the positions of which have been adjusted in advance so as to be displayed in the display area. In particular, the background image in this characteristic part 006SG is drawn as an image longer in the left-right and up-down directions than the display area of the image display device 5, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays the center part of the background image in the left-right direction. In other words, in this characteristic part 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area for drawing and arranging the background image are areas for drawing and arranging an image that is longer in the up-down and left-right dimensions than the display area of the image display device 5, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays only the part of the image that corresponds to the display area.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, an example is shown in which the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area are areas for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. The layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area may be areas for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5, while the display image creation area may be an image for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are the same as the display area of the image display device 5. In this case, the background image can be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by arranging only the parts of the image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area that correspond to the display area of the image display device 5 in the display image creation area.

The performance control CPU 120 also checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that a pattern confirmation command has been received is on (step 006SGS930; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control shifts to one that stops the fluctuation. Therefore, even if a fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards or the like is received, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern ends).

Figure 14-18 is a flow chart showing the display image processing (step 006SGS926) during the variable display performance processing shown in Figure 14-17. In the display image processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the display image processing flag is on or not (step 006SGS941). If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it determines whether the variable display being executed is a variable display due to the Super Reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS942). If the variable display being executed is a variable display due to the Super Reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS942; Y), it selects the displacement image data for successful development to the Super Reach performance (for announcing the execution of the Super Reach performance) and proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

The displacement image data in this characteristic part 006SG is data in which displacement images to be applied to the displacement target image (in the case of this characteristic part 006SG, an image obtained by superimposing an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (an image arranged in the displacement image creation area)) are arranged in chronological order.

In addition, if the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of a normal reach (step 006SGS942; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines at a predetermined ratio whether to select the displacement image data A for failed development of a super reach performance or the displacement image data B for failed development of a super reach performance as the displacement image data for failed development of a super reach performance (for notifying of non-execution of a super reach performance) (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of the displacement image data A for failed development of a super reach performance may be determined at a ratio of 50%, and the selection of the displacement image data B for failed development of a super reach performance may be determined at a ratio of 50%.

Note that, in this feature section 006SG, an example is given of a form in which two displacement image data can be selected as the displacement image data for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance: displacement image data A for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance and displacement image data B for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be three or more displacement image data that can be selected as the displacement image data for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the selection of the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). If the selection of the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS946). If the selection of the displacement image data B for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided (step 006SGS945; N), the displacement image data B for the failed development of the super reach performance is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, it selects the first displacement image from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949) and proceeds to step 006SGS951.

Also, if the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the performance control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the performance control CPU 120 executes a displacement image drawing process. In this displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 creates a displacement target image by, for example, synthesizing (superimposing) an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 14-5 in the displacement image creation area, and executes a process of creating a displacement image by applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image can be determined, for example, by whether the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data.

If the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off and the display image processing process is terminated (step 006SGS953); if the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is terminated without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display of the decorative symbols in this characteristic section 006SG will be described with reference to Figs. 14-20 to 14-23. First, as shown in Figs. 14-20(A) and 14-20(B), in this characteristic section 006SG, the display mode of the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the game state. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 14-20(A), when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state), a normal state decorative symbol combining a character image and a numerical image is displayed as the decorative symbol. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 14-20(B), when the game state is the time-saving state (low probability low base state or high probability high base state), a time-saving state decorative symbol consisting of only a numerical image is displayed as the decorative symbol.

In the variable display with the Super Reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 14-21 (A) and 14-21 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging in a reach combination, and then a middle decorative symbol with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative symbols stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. In the development suggestion performance, as shown in Figure 14-21 (C), the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol, a middle area 006SG005C including the middle decorative symbol, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative symbol. Then, as shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), the image displayed in middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image contained in middle area 006SG005C) slides downward in stages, causing a development notification pattern (the pattern labeled "Development!" shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E)) to move from above toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5, indicating that the development will progress to a Super Reach reach performance.

The development notification pattern in this feature part 006SG is a pattern that is displayed only when the development suggestion effect is being executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other effects during the variable display.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (the left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R (the right decorative pattern and background image) slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases as it progresses through the first stage shown in Figure 14-21 (C), the second stage shown in Figure 14-21 (D), and the third stage shown in Figure 14-21 (E).

Then, when the third stage of sliding of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is completed, the development notification symbol moves to the center of the display area of the image display device 5 (the center of the middle area 006SG005C), and the development of the Super Reach into a Reach performance is announced.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a normal reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 14-22 (A) and 14-22 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging in a reach combination, and then a middle decorative symbol with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative symbols stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As a development suggestion performance, as shown in Figure 14-22 (C), the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol, a middle area 006SG005C including the middle decorative symbol, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative symbol. Then, as shown in Figures 14-22(C) to 14-22(E), the image displayed in middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image contained in middle area 006SG005C) slides downward in stages, causing the development notification pattern, which notifies the player that the game will develop into a Super Reach reach performance, to move from above toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (the left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R (the right decorative pattern and background image) slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases as it progresses through the first stage shown in Figure 14-22 (C) and the second stage shown in Figure 14-22 (D).

However, in the variable display of the normal reach, after the first stage of sliding movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R has been executed, or after the second stage of sliding movement has been executed, as shown in FIG. 14-22(E), the development suggestion performance ends without the third stage of sliding movement being executed, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIG. 14-22(B), and the decorative patterns and small patterns stop in a combination indicating a miss.

As shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), in this characteristic section 006SG, the sliding movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R increases as the stages progress, but the present invention is not limited to this. The sliding movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R may decrease as the stages progress, or the movement amount may increase or decrease only in one of the first to third stages.

In addition, in this characteristic section 006SG, an example is given of a form in which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can be slid up to three levels as a development suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of levels by which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can be slid as a development suggestion effect may be two levels or less or four levels or more.

As shown in Figures 14-21(C) to 14-21(E), in this characteristic part 006SG, the sliding direction of the image displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R is exemplified as being opposite to that of the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding direction of the image displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R may be the same as that of the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, an example has been given of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 for development suggestion effects when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may also be displaced for development suggestion effects when the game state is a time-saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state).

As shown in Fig. 14-23(A) to Fig. 14-23(E), the development suggestion performance in this characteristic part 006SG is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first pending memory display area 006SG005D and the second pending memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, a decorative pattern including the development notification pattern described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a background image is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In other words, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in both the case of variable display of the normal reach variation pattern and the case of variable display of the super reach variation pattern, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are images drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and are therefore asymmetrical in displacement. For this reason, while the decorative symbols move upward or downward as a development suggestion performance toward the top or bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, reducing visibility to the player, the first interface image 006SG005I remains displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and the second interface image 006SG005J remains displayed at the top right of the display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J does not decrease.

As shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in the variable display in the Super Reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the third stage, while in the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display in the Super Reach variation pattern is set to a higher rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, so in this feature part 006SG, the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance.

In addition, in the development suggestion presentation of this feature part 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains a left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains a middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains a right decorative pattern, and these left, middle, and right decorative patterns, including the characters and numbers, slide along without being separated, preventing the left, middle, and right decorative patterns from being separated, which reduces the interest of the development suggestion presentation.

Note that, in this characteristic section 006SG, an example is shown in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one or two of the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic section 006SG, specific effects that displace the display positions of the decorative symbols and background images (development suggestion effects in characteristic section 006SG, reach suggestion effects in variant 006SG-1, revival effects in variant 006SG-2, foresight notice effects in variant 006SG-3, promotion effects in variant 006SG-5, and temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects in variant 006SG-6) can be executed simply by using image data for displaying the decorative symbols and background images and displacement image data for displacing the display positions of these decorative symbols and background images, so the amount of data stored in the CGROM 205 can be reduced compared to when these specific effects are executed using dedicated data.

In particular, since this feature section 006SG is capable of displaying multiple images as background images on the image display device 5, it would normally be necessary to store in advance in CGROM 205 a presentation pattern for a specific presentation depending on when each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. However, with this feature section 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced simply by using data for the displacement image, so the amount of data stored in CGROM 205 can be reduced. In addition, in this characteristic section 006SG, as game-related information, a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D capable of identifying the number of reserved first special symbols, a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U capable of identifying the number of reserved second special symbols, and a small pattern with a smaller display area than the decorative pattern are displayed on the image display device 5 are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as game-related information, a launch promotion display that prompts the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big winning opening or gate 41 because the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state, or a fourth pattern that can identify that a variable display is being executed, etc. may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority. In other words, they are asymmetric images for image displacement in the development suggestion performance in this feature part 006SG. Therefore, their display positions do not shift with the images in the left area 006SG005L, right area 006SG005R, and middle area 006SG005C, which are the objects of displacement, and it is possible to prevent game-related information, such as the number of reserved special symbols and the variable display of small symbols, from being difficult for the player to see when the development suggestion performance is being executed.

Furthermore, of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right area 006SG005R which slides upward during the development suggestion performance, but since the display position of the second interface image 006SG005J itself does not displace, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the second interface image 006SG005J without feeling any discomfort. On the other hand, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance, so the player can accurately recognize the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D, which identifiably displays the first reserved memory number in the first interface image 006SG005I, and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U, which identifiably displays the second reserved memory number, without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-23, the decorative symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion effect is being performed, the decorative symbols move upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, thereby reducing visibility and improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect. Furthermore, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion effect is being performed, unlike the decorative symbols, they do not move from the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, so visibility does not decrease, and the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by viewing the small symbols even when a development suggestion effect is being performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-21, the development suggestion effect of this feature part 006SG gradually increases the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R, improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect while emphasizing the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R at each stage, thereby further improving the presentation effect.

As shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, in the variable display in the super reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the third stage, while in the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage. Therefore, the proportion of the jackpot game state controlled varies depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion presentation. This allows the player to focus on the number of stages of movement of the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R in the development suggestion presentation, thereby increasing the presentation interest of the development suggestion presentation.

As shown in Figures 14-21 and 14-22, when using displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and when using displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage, the parts in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common, and the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage, When using displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage, the part in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage is the same as when using displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the number of stages, etc., that the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage as a development suggestion presentation, thereby further increasing the interest of the development suggestion presentation.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 14-24 and 14-25 as modified example 006SG-1, a reach suggestion effect that suggests that a reach will occur during the variable display may be executed as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the reach suggestion presentation will be explained based on Figures 14-24 and 14-25. First, in the variable display with the variable pattern of normal reach or super reach, as shown in Figures 14-24(A) to 14-24(C), an action image such as a character acts on the left decorative pattern just before the left decorative pattern stops, causing the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the left decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-24(D) to 14-24(F), just before the right decorative symbol stops, an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol, causing the right decorative symbol to stop and reach a winning state. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the right decorative symbol is displayed distorted.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 14-25(A) to 14-25(C), an action image such as a character acts on the left decorative pattern just before the left decorative pattern stops, causing the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the left decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-25(D) to 14-25(F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern just before the right decorative pattern stops, but the right decorative pattern stops in a number of patterns that do not result in a reach combination. At this time, the right decorative pattern stops and a reach is reached. At this time, the part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the right decorative pattern is displayed without distortion.

As shown in Fig. 14-26(A) to Fig. 14-26(F), the reach indication performance in this modified example 006SG-1 is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, an action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-1 has a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example is given of a form in which a reach suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible not to execute a reach suggestion effect in some of the variable displays of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example of a reach suggestion effect is shown in which an action image such as a character acts on the left and right decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a reach suggestion effect in a variable display of a non-reach variation pattern, it is also possible to provide a case in which the action image acts on the decorative symbols only once (only acting on the left decorative symbol).

Moreover, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example is given of an action image such as a character acting on a decorative pattern as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple action images can be displayed as reach suggestion effects, and the rate at which a reach occurs can be varied depending on which action image acts on the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, in the case where an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect but the reach does not occur, an example is given in which the decorative pattern that acted and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern are not distorted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern that the action image acted on and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern may always be distorted regardless of whether the reach occurs or not.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, when an action image such as a character is used as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern affected by the action image and a part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern are distorted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character is used as a reach suggestion effect, only one of the decorative pattern affected by the action image and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern may be distorted.

In addition, in the characteristic section 213SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a Super Reach into a Reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 14-27 and 14-28 as modified example 006SG-2, a revival effect in which a decorative pattern that was once stopped and displayed as a losing combination changes into a winning combination may be executed as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the revival presentation will be explained based on Fig. 14-27 and Fig. 14-28. First, when the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in Fig. 14-27 (A), the variable display result is suggested to be a miss as a reach presentation of a normal reach or super reach, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a swinging manner in a reach miss combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern in the middle, and the decorative pattern in the middle is split into multiple pieces along the crack effect image 006SG005H as a first-stage crack. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-27(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 14-27(B) as a second-stage crack, and each piece moves so as to diffuse from the center of the image display device 5 in different directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14-27(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in Figure 14-27(C) as a third stage crack, and each piece moves to spread out further.

Then, as the fourth stage of cracking, an image of the fragments of the decorative pattern inside scattering and scattering is displayed, after which a new decorative pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed as the decorative pattern inside, and the variable display stops.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Figure 14-28 (A), after the reach effect of a normal reach or super reach suggests that the variable display result is a miss, the decorative patterns are displayed in a swaying manner in a reach miss combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-28(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern in the center, and the decorative pattern in the center is split into multiple pieces along the crack effect image 006SG005H as a first-stage crack. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-28(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 14-28(B) as a second-stage crack, and each piece moves so as to diffuse from the center of the image display device 5 in different directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14-28 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in Figure 14-28 (C) as a third stage crack, and each piece moves to spread out further.

However, in a variable display where the variable display result is a miss, after the first stage crack is executed, after the second stage crack is executed, or after the third stage crack is executed, the fourth stage crack is not executed, the revival performance ends, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in Figure 14-28 (A), and the decorative pattern and small pattern stop in a combination that indicates a miss.

As shown in Figures 14-29(A) to 14-29(F), the revival performance in this modified example 006SG-2 involves drawing a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, drawing a crack effect image 006SG005H in the layer 2 image drawing area, and drawing a decorative pattern in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-2 for drawing images lower than the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created from the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image (an image in which the decorative pattern inside is split into multiple pieces and each piece is displayed as if it is diffusing).

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, in this modified example 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside gradually expands as a revival effect. In other words, in the revival effect, the proportion of the display area of the decorative pattern inside to the display area of the image display device 5 increases gradually, so that the gradual expansion of the decorative pattern inside makes it possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the revival effect.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, a form in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is superimposed on the decorative pattern in the middle as a revival performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple display modes of the crack effect image 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-30, blue and red are set as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 20% of the time when the revival performance is executed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 80% of the time when the revival performance is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 80% of the time when the revival performance is executed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 20% of the time when the revival performance is executed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are used as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more colors may be used as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, an example is given of a form in which a revival effect is executed when the game state is in a time-saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a revival effect may also be executed when the game state is in a normal state (low probability low base state).

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in FIG. 14-28, the decorative pattern in the revival performance is composed of multiple fragments, and these fragments are moved in stages from the center to the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 while maintaining the number of fragments as the revival performance progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiple fragments that make up the decorative pattern in the middle may increase in stages as the revival performance progresses. In this way, the visual effect of the number of fragments that make up the decorative pattern in the middle increasing as the revival performance progresses makes a strong impression of the revival performance on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a Super Reach into a Reach effect is exemplified as an effect that displaces the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-31 as modified example 006SG-3, an effect that displaces the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be a look-ahead preview effect that suggests from a variable display several times ago that a variable display will be executed in the variable pattern of a Super Reach in the reserved memory, or that a variable display that results in a jackpot will be executed.

The performance mode of the pre-reading preview performance will be explained based on FIG. 14-31. First, in a state where there are multiple reserved memories, as shown in FIG. 14-31(A) and FIG. 14-31(B), the variable display in progress stops with a combination of decorative symbols that is a miss. Next, as shown in FIG. 14-31(C) and FIG. 14-31(D), when the next variable display starts, in the display area of the image display device 5, the cutting effect image 006SG005S that crosses the display area from left to right is displayed overlapping with the decorative symbols and background image. Then, the display area displayed on the image display device 5, excluding the first interface image 006SG005I, is divided into a lower area 006SG005B below including the decorative symbols and part of the background image and an upper area 006SG005T above including the remaining decorative symbols and background image, with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as the boundary. In other words, the boundary between the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T above is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

As shown in Figures 14-31(D) to 14-31(E), the lower region 006SG005B simultaneously slides left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper region 006SG005T simultaneously slides right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. The lower region 006SG005B, which has slid left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, then slides downward, while the upper region 006SG005T, which has slid right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides upward. At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed moving so as to follow the boundary on both the lower region 006SG005B side and the upper region 006SG005T side.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-31(E) and FIG. 14-31(F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the display of a black image begins with the downward sliding movement of the lower area 006SG005B and the upward sliding movement of the upper area 006SG005T. The display area of the black image expands as the downward sliding movement of the lower area 006SG005B and the upward sliding movement of the upper area 006SG005T progresses, and when the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T have completed moving out of the display area, the display area appears in a so-called blacked-out state in which only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed.

After this, when the blackout ends, a new background image and decorative pattern will begin to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. This pre-reading preview performance will be repeated until the variable display of the outer pre-reading target begins.

As shown in Fig. 14-32(A) to Fig. 14-32(F), the preview performance in this modified example 006SG-3 is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-3 has a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing images even lower. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image including a lower area 006SG005B and an upper area 006SG005T is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

As described above, in this modified example 006SG-3, in the look-ahead preview performance as a specific performance of the present invention, as shown in Figures 14-31 (C) and 14-31 (D), decorative patterns and background images are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left, and a cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed at the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, so that the player can more effectively recognize the left and right lateral movement of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B as the look-ahead preview performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and positioned in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and background image, so even if the display positions of the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B are displaced, the display position of the cutting effect image 006SG005S does not displace. Therefore, by comparing the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B with the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the displacement of the display positions of the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B can be made more prominent, further improving the presentation effect of the pre-reading preview presentation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14-31 (D) and 14-31 (E), by moving the upper region 006SG005T to the right and the lower region 006SG005B to the left, and then further moving the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B upward and downward, respectively, the presentation effect of the pre-reading preview presentation can be further enhanced and the presentation interest can be increased. In particular, as shown in Figures 14-31 (D) and 14-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left, but the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, so the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary have a synergistic effect, which can further enhance the effect of the pre-reading preview.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, the movement direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is an up-down direction different from the right side, which is the movement direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the movement direction of the lower region 006SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the movement direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is different from either the movement direction of the upper region 006SG005T or the movement direction of the lower region 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, a cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a pre-reading preview performance, and the lower area 006SG005B and upper area 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are displayed movingly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result in the pre-reading target variable display becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, three colors, blue, green, and red, are set as the display colors for the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and if the variable display result of the pre-read target is a jackpot, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue 10% of the time, in green 30% of the time, and in red 60% of the time. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the pre-read target is a miss, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue 60% of the time, in green 30% of the time, and in red 10% of the time.

By doing this, the player can be drawn to the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S that is displayed during the preview performance, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect of the preview performance.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, three colors, blue, green, and red, are used as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. In addition, the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) may be different depending on aspects other than color, such as the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S and the number of cutting effect images 006SG005S displayed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is given of the image displayed on the image display device 5 being divided into two areas along the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas as a pre-reading preview performance. In this case, the effect of the pre-reading preview performance may be improved by varying the direction in which each area slides.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is shown in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved as a pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area that moves as a pre-reading preview performance may be only one of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, decorative patterns and background images are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after being moved to the right is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after being moved to the left. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B, so that the pre-reading preview performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is shown in which the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left may be the same. In this way, an element of surprise can be added to the pre-reading preview performance, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in Figures 14-31 (C) and 14-31 (D), the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is the same as the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left as the look-ahead preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a part of the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead preview performance does not have to be displayed as the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left as the look-ahead preview performance. In this way, the performance interest of the look-ahead preview performance can be increased.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a pre-reading preview performance (in Figure 14-31 (D) the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left, and in Figure 14-31 (E) the upper area 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower area 006SG005B is moved downward), the amount of movement (displacement) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a pre-reading preview performance, the amount of movement (displacement) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B may be different. In this way, by varying the amount of movement of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, which move in opposite directions as part of the look-ahead preview performance, the effect of the look-ahead preview performance can be further improved.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIG. 14-33, an example is given in which the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot is varied depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 14-34 as modified example 006SG-4, the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be made changeable each time the variable display is executed. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) may be varied depending on the final display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S and the change pattern of the display color.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example of a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is given as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-35 as modified example 006SG-5, as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, a promotion effect (also called a re-draw effect) may be executed in which decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot type such as a non-variable jackpot or a 2-round variable jackpot with a small number of rounds during the variable display, and then the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner in a combination that indicates a jackpot, and the final combination of decorative patterns that stops indicates the jackpot type.

The presentation mode of the promotion presentation will be explained based on Fig. 14-35. First, the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as a normal reach or super reach presentation, and then, as shown in Fig. 14-35(A), after the end of these reach presentations, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot type that is relatively less advantageous to the player, such as a non-variable jackpot or a two-round variable jackpot (in the example shown in Fig. 14-35(A), the combination is the even number "2" that indicates a non-variable jackpot).

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-35(B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed variably at a uniform speed as a promotion effect, including combinations of decorative symbols for other jackpot types, such as 2-round special jackpot, 5-round special jackpot, and 10-round special jackpot.

While the promotion effect is being performed, as shown in Figures 14-35(C) and 14-35(D), the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left in two stages.

If the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type indicated by the combination of decorative symbols displayed first (see FIG. 14-35(A)), the decorative symbols will stop with that jackpot type combination (a sure-win combination in the example shown in FIG. 14-35(E)) after the first or second stage distortion of the promotion effect. On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the combination of decorative symbols displayed first, the decorative symbols will stop with that jackpot type combination (a non- sure-win combination in the example shown in FIG. 14-35(F)) after the first stage distortion of the promotion effect.

In addition, the "degree of advantage to the player" between the types of jackpots in this modified example 006SG-5 refers to whether or not the jackpot is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot play ends, the number of variable display times that are controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot play ends, and the number of rounds in the jackpot play.

As shown in Figures 14-36(A) to 14-36(E), the promotion effect in this modified example 006SG-5 involves drawing a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, drawing a decorative pattern in the layer 2 image drawing area, and drawing a background image in the layer 3 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to create a displacement image in which the vertical center is distorted toward the left.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is an image that is longer in the left-right and up-down width directions than the display area of the image display device 5, as in the characteristic part 006SG (see FIG. 14-19), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-37, the left-right dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 may be the same as the left-right dimension of the display area of the image display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in Figures 14-38(A) to 14-38(C), when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left as a promotion effect, a non-image display area in which no image is displayed is formed on the right side of the display area.

In this case, when the horizontal dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the horizontal dimension of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-37, as shown in FIG. 14-39(A) to FIG. 14-39(D), when the promotion effect is executed, the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, or the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area is enlarged, so that a part of the background image is placed outside the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, even if the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, the background image placed outside the display area of the image display device 5 due to the enlargement is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, so that the risk of inappropriate display on the image display device 5, such as the formation of the above-mentioned non-display area, can be reduced.

In addition, in FIG. 14-39, an example is shown in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image area where no image is displayed on the right side of the display area when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left as a promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the background image may be enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image area.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion effect is executed, an image for the promotion effect is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image to be displaced that has been enlarged so that its left-right dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the image to be displaced to which the displacement image is applied is limited to only the portion of the image to be displaced that corresponds to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, it is not necessary to displace the image to the extent that it is outside the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, in the case where the horizontal dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the horizontal dimension of the display area of the image display device 5, when the promotion performance is executed, the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image part during the execution of the promotion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area may be enlarged in stages according to the progress of the promotion performance (according to the increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). In this way, the sense of incongruity caused by the decorative pattern and background image being suddenly enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5 can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent an inappropriate display such as the display of a non-image part on the image display device 5 in the process of increasing the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 while maintaining the performance effect of the promotion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, an example was given of a form in which a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of the reach effect of the super reach during variable display can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pseudo consecutive effect including a temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display can be executed during variable display, and the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (the probability of a jackpot) can be varied depending on the number of times the pseudo consecutive effect is executed.

In particular, in a variable display that executes such pseudo consecutive effects, it may be possible to execute a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop just before the timing of the decorative pattern's temporary stop, or a temporary stop notification effect that notifies the user of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern when the decorative pattern has temporarily stopped.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged, and part of the display image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the formation of a non-display area during the execution of the promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image larger in size than the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of modified example 006SG-5, the left and right dimensions are at least longer than the left and right dimensions of the display area of the image display device 5) may be stored in advance in CGROM 205 as an image for the promotion effect, and the image may be drawn and arranged in the displacement image creation area or display image creation area to prevent the formation of a non-display area during the execution of the promotion effect.

Furthermore, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion performance is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged, and a part of the display image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the formation of a non-display image area during the execution of the promotion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a promotion performance is executed, an image (non-display image) different from the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 may be arranged adjacent to the display image in a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modified example 006SG-5, the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5) in the display image creation area. In this way, when a promotion performance is executed, the display image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other across the display area and non-display area of the image display device 5, so that a part of the non-display image is displayed instead of the non-display image area.

In the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 14-40 to 14-42 as modified example 006SG-6, these tentative stop suggestion effects and tentative stop notification effects may be executed as effects in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the tentative stop suggestion presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 14-40. First, as shown in FIG. 14-40(A), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) and a reach is reached. After that, as a tentative stop suggestion presentation, a pseudo consecutive symbol (the symbol displayed as "NEXT"), which is part of the decorative symbol, moves from the top to the bottom. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a ripple effect image 006SG005P converging from the periphery of the display area to the center of the display area, and the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (the left and right decorative symbols and the background image) is displayed distorted.

If the variable display is a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance (a variable display in which the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 14-40(B), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, and a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that does not execute a pseudo consecutive performance (a variable display in which the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 14-40(C), the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, but move downward in the display area of the image display device 5 and become invisible, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is a miss is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 14-40, a form is exemplified in which a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 to suggest that the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) will temporarily stop, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display forms for the ripple effect image 006SG005P may be provided, and the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) temporarily stops may be varied depending on which display form the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed in as a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance.

For example, in FIG. 14-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (double display) as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, but as shown in FIG. 14-41, it is possible to provide a case where only one ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, and the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) temporarily stops can be varied according to the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo consecutive effect.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-6, the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed as part of the decorative pattern, in other words, the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed as part of the variable display even during periods other than the pseudo consecutive performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive pattern may be a pattern different from the decorative pattern and a special pattern that is displayed only during the pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in Figures 14-42(A) and 14-42(B), after the temporary stop indication effect is executed and the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed diffusing from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to the periphery of the display area, and the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (the decorative symbols on the left and right and the background image) is displayed distorted.

As shown in Figures 14-43(A) to 14-43(F), the temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects in this modified example 006SG-6 are as follows: a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area; a ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area; and decorative patterns including pseudo consecutive patterns are drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-6 for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image (decorative pattern and background image distorted by ripple effect image 006SG005P) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006GS, an example was given of a form in which a performance image is displayed using an image display device 5 capable of displaying only planar images, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 14-44 and 14-45 as modified example 006SG-7, a performance image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying stereoscopic images.

Modification 006SG-7 will be described below. Note that in the characteristic part 006SG and the modification described above, an example is given of a form in which a display device such as an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) capable of displaying planar images (2D images) is used as the image display device 5, but the feature of this modification 006SG-7 is that, as shown in FIG. 14-44, a naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is used that allows the player to view stereoscopic images with the naked eye using a parallax barrier method, making it possible to display stereoscopic images (3D images) in addition to planar images (2D images) as various images.

As shown in FIG. 14-44, the naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' of this modified example 006SG-7 has a structure including an image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image), a backlight 006SG901 that irradiates planar light from the rear of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 toward the front, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 that is provided on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 with a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900.

The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is a relatively optically transparent liquid crystal panel that allows for a parallax barrier image display state in which a parallax barrier image is displayed, which has vertically striped black sections that act as shutters to prevent the right eye image (R image) displayed in the vertically long stripes on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 from being seen by the left eye of the player and the left eye image (L image) from being seen by the right eye of the player, and transparent sections that allow the right eye image to be seen by the right eye of the player and the left eye image to be seen by the left eye of the player, and a transparent display state in which all pixels are transparent and do not have vertically striped black sections.

The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 can display, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of a left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier image described above is made non-display (fully transparent display) on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, so that a planar image (2D image) can also be displayed.

In other words, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5', which is the display means of this modified example 006SG-7, can display a naked-eye stereoscopic image composed of an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye in addition to a planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image.

The stereoscopic image consisting of a right-eye image and a left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn on each of the layers described above, just like the planar image (2D image), while the parallax barrier image displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When such a naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is used to display a performance image, during variable display, other performances may be executed by displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) at a timing different from the specific performance (e.g., development suggestion performance) in the present invention.

As shown in Figures 14-45(A) to 14-45(D), during variable display, the naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is capable of executing a specific effect in which the image of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R moving upward as displacement specific images, and the image of the center area 006SG005C moving downward as described above, and a variable display preview effect is executed that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a preview effect whose execution period does not overlap with the development suggestion effect, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display preview effect.

In other words, when a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that are displaced specific images and move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that is moved downward, are displayed, only the planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the image of the left region 006SG005L and right region 006SG005R moving upward as a displacement specific image, and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moving downward as an image are displayed, the display is made to be a planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to a stereoscopic image, and thus preventing a decrease in the interest of the presentation.

In this embodiment, since the execution period of the performance in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed differs from that of the development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance in which displacement specific images, images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R moved upward, and an image of the middle area 006SG005C moved downward, are displayed, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) is restricted based on the execution period of the performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) are displayed during the same performance, data such as a display in progress flag that can identify that a displacement specific image is being displayed may be stored so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed while the displacement specific image is being displayed, and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted based on the data. In addition, regarding these restrictions, in order to prevent a stereoscopic image (3D image) from being displayed immediately after or immediately before the display of the displacement specific image has ended, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag for a specified period before and after the period during which the displacement specific image is displayed.

In the above-mentioned modified example 006SG-7, a parallax barrier type naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' using the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and stereoscopic images (3D images) may be displayed using naked eye stereoscopic image display devices using a lenticular lens method or integral imaging method other than the parallax barrier method.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG0-7, a form in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion performance has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a case in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed in the development suggestion performance may also be provided. In addition, if a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed in the development suggestion performance, the stereoscopic image (3D image) image (right eye image and left eye image) can be drawn and arranged in an image drawing area (for example, layer 1 image drawing area) that is higher than the image drawing area in which the planar image (2D image) is drawn and arranged. In this way, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed with priority over the planar image (2D image), so the stereoscopic image (3D image) can be displayed preferably in the development suggestion performance.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-7, a form in which a variable display preview effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot is executed in a period different from the development suggestion effect (specific effect) as an effect for displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed as an introduction effect for the development suggestion effect (specific effect) in a period prior to the development suggestion effect (specific effect). In this way, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) can make the player aware in advance that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) will be executed, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect (specific effect). Furthermore, multiple presentation modes for the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect) may be provided, and the presentation mode of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) may be different depending on which presentation mode the introduction effect is executed in.

In addition, the introduction performance may be performed by operating the movable body 32, and the effects of the introduction performance and the development suggestion performance (specific performance) may be improved by coordinating the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of a stereoscopic image (3D image).

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example of the present invention being applied to a pachinko gaming machine 1 is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a slot machine.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 14-46 as modified example 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (corresponding to the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J in the characteristic part 006SG) may display medal payout display, remaining number of games in the AT (assist time), medal display stored as credits, etc. together with the presentation image on the image display device 5, and these game-related information may be treated as non-target images for displacement.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each of the modified examples, an example is given of a form in which a special effect of the present invention is performed in which the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed or distorted (distorted), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special effect may be performed in which the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is repeatedly changed or distorted.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modified example, the development suggestion effect, reach suggestion effect, revival effect, look-ahead notice effect, promotion effect, temporary stop suggestion effect, and temporary stop notification effect are exemplified as specific effects in the present invention, but multiple effects may be executed as these specific effects. In addition, when multiple specific effects are executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, an effect in which the decorative pattern (characters and numbers) such as the development suggestion effect is not divided can be executed in the normal state, while an effect in which the decorative pattern (only numbers) is divided into multiple pieces or display areas such as the revival effect and look-ahead notice effect can be executed. In this way, in the normal state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the specific effect due to the decorative pattern including characters and numbers not being divided, and conversely, in the time-saving state, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by dividing the decorative pattern of only numbers.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example was given of a form in which the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers in the normal state, and the decorative pattern is composed of numbers only in the time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed midway through the variable display in a specific variable pattern, such as the variable display in the variable pattern of a super reach. For example, in the variable display of a super reach, a variable display of a decorative pattern composed of characters and numbers may be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, and a variable display of a decorative pattern composed of numbers only may be executed during the period after the reach. Furthermore, during the period after the reach, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern is divided, such as a revival effect, as a specific effect in this invention.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modified example, an example is given of an image in which at least a part of the specific image in the present invention is displaced in the left-right direction or the up-down direction and displayed as a displaced specific image on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a part of the specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed as a displaced specific image on the image display device 5. In other words, the displacement direction of the image in the present invention may include the enlargement/reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG, as shown in Figs. 14-3 and 14-4, a form of generating a displacement image by a replacement method in which pixel X corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image is identified from a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image according to the R value and G value of the pixel A, and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) to a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a displacement image may be generated by a method (movement method) in which pixel X at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image in the displacement target image is moved to a position corresponding to the R value and G value of the pixel A. Note that, in the replacement method, as in modified example 006SG-3, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the area close to the boundary into a displacement image that takes into account the width of the boundary of the area with different movement directions, whereas in the case of the replacement method, such editing is not necessary, so that the load of creating the image can be reduced, and in addition, when an effect image or the like is placed on the boundary, the degree of freedom of setting the boundary where the effect image is placed can be increased, so that the load of creating the image including the effect image can be reduced.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A sound output means;
A display means having a display area capable of displaying an image;
a storage means capable of storing image data of an image to be displayed in the display area;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers on which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing the images arranged on the plurality of display layers;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
the display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area;
The specific performance is,
the display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs a performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either one of an advantageous aspect or an unfavorable aspect is notified as a performance result,
The performance execution means includes:
The first display area is capable of displaying the effected video,
In the second display area, information display relating to a game can be displayed;
During the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while the effected moving image in an effect manner progressing at a first speed is displayed in the first display area,
During the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effected moving image in an effect mode proceeding at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
the light emission mode of the light-emitting means can be changed in both the first period and the second period, and the light emission mode of the light-emitting means can be changed in the second period at intervals shorter than that of the first period;
In the second period, after displaying the effect video proceeding at the second speed, a still effect is executed in which a still image is displayed by freezing the effect video,
There are a plurality of still effects.
Depending on which of the presentation modes of the still presentation is, the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The performance execution means includes:
The information display can be a telop display,
The telop display can be displayed in an operational manner,
The operation of displaying the telop is continued even during the execution of the still effect,
the telop display speed can be kept unchanged during the first period and the second period;
A gaming machine characterized by: